Yamaha psr-5700 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: psr-5700

Categoría: Sintetizador

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Advanced Features

Programmieranleitung

Fonctions avancées

Características avanzadas

OWNER’S MANUAL

Advanced Features

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

Programmieranleitung

MODE D’EMPLOI

Fonctions avancées

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

Características avanzadas

The Sequencer .................................................................... 3

■ Recording ....................................................................... 3

■ Deleting Tracks ............................................................... 5

■ Playback ......................................................................... 6

■ Sequence Editing ........................................................... 7

E1 CONDITION/REC TYPE ............................................. 7

E2 VOLUME................................................................... 8

E3 TRACK COPY/MIX ..................................................... 9

E4 QUANTIZE .............................................................. 10

E5 DELETE ALL TRACKS ............................................. 11

E6 INSERT ALL TRACKS .............................................. 12

E7 ERASE ................................................................... 12

E8 REMOVE EVENT ..................................................... 13

E9 NOTE SHIFT ........................................................... 14

E10 SONG CLEAR ....................................................... 14

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer............... 15

■ Basic Programming Procedure ..................................... 15

■ Using a Custom Accompaniment ................................. 18

■ Custom Accompaniment Editing .................................. 19

1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. (Measure/Beat)............................ 19

2 VOLUME ................................................................... 19

3 FADER SELECT ........................................................ 20

4 NAME ....................................................................... 20

5 SAVE TO ACCOMP.................................................... 20

6 QUANTIZE ................................................................ 21

7 COPY ....................................................................... 22

8 REMOVE EVENT ....................................................... 23

9 CHANGE PATTERN ................................................... 23

• CREATING INTRO, FILL-IN, & ENDING PATTERNS ...... 24

• EXITING FROM THE CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT

MODE ....................................................................... 25

Other Functions ................................................................ 26

■ General Function Selection & Editing Procedure ......... 26

[F1] Custom Voice Edit ................................................... 27

■ Standard Voice Edit Functions

(Voices 00 through 89) .... 27

1 NAME ....................................................................... 27

2 COMMON ................................................................. 28

3 MODULATION ........................................................... 28

4 EG RATE .................................................................. 29

5 TONE ....................................................................... 30

■ Dual Voice Edit Functions (Voices 90 through 97) ........... 30

1 DUAL NAME.............................................................. 30

2 DUAL VOICE ............................................................. 31

3 DUAL OCTAVE .......................................................... 31

4 DUAL VOLUME ......................................................... 31

5 DUAL PAN ................................................................ 32

6 DUAL DETUNE .......................................................... 32

■ Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voices 98 and 99) ............... 33

1 PERC. NAME ............................................................ 33

2 PERC. PITCH ............................................................ 33

3 PERC. PAN ............................................................... 34

4 PERC. TONE ............................................................. 34

[F2] Reverb, Effect............................................................ 35

1 REVERB TYPE .......................................................... 35

2 REVERB DEPTH ....................................................... 35

3 EFFECT TYPE........................................................... 36

4 EFFECT DEPTH ........................................................ 36

[F3] Controller & Key Velocity....................................... 37

1 KEY VELOCITY ......................................................... 37

2 FOOT SWITCH SELECT ............................................ 37

3 EXP. PEDAL SELECT ................................................ 38

4 SUSTAIN PART SELECT ............................................ 38

5 PITCH BEND SELECT ............................................... 39

6 WHEEL SELECT ....................................................... 39

[F4] Split Point, Interactive Accompaniment, &

Super Style Play Mode ........................................... 40

1 SPLIT POINT ............................................................. 40

2 INTERACTIVE ACCOMP. ........................................... 40

3 SUPER STYLE PLAY MODE ....................................... 41

[F5] Disk .............................................................................. 42

■ The [TO DISK] Button ................................................... 42

■ The [FROM DISK] Button ............................................. 44

■ The [F5] DISK Functions .............................................. 45

1 FROM DISK .............................................................. 45

2 TO DISK ................................................................... 46

3 RENAME FILE ........................................................... 46

4 DELETE FILE ............................................................ 47

5 FORMAT DISK .......................................................... 47

6 DISK FREE AREA ...................................................... 47

• Disk Error Messages .................................................. 48

[F6] Utility & MIDI .............................................................. 49

1 MEMORY BACKUP .................................................... 49

2 RECALL INITIAL DATA ............................................... 50

■ The [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] Button ...... 50

3 MIDI CHANNEL SETTING ........................................... 54

4 MULTI PART SETTING .............................................. 56

5 MIDI SWITCH ............................................................ 56

6 MIDI SYSTEM ........................................................... 57

7 DATA TRANSMIT ...................................................... 58

Index..................................................................................... 59

MIDI Function Tree ......................................................... 242

MIDI Messages .............................................................. 246

DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List ................. 253

GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List .......................... 254

PSR-5700 Percussion Map ............................................ 255

GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map .................................... 256

MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................ 257

Specificationes ............................................................... 258

The PSR-5700 Advanced Features manual contains operating instructions for the instrument’s

more complex and advanced features. If you are yet familiar with PSR-5700’s basic features and the

way it works in general, we recommend that you go through the PSR-5700 Getting Started manual

prior to attempting to use the features described in this manual.

Contents

CSet Up All Record Parameters

Select the accompaniment style you want to record with, voices, orches-

tration, harmony, and other parameters before actually beginning recording.

A list of the parameters that can be recorded by the PSR-5700 sequencer is

given below.

You may also need to select a specific record mode and other conditions

accessible via the sequencer’s CONDITION/RECORD TYPE functions,

described on page 7.

ZEngage the Sequencer

DETAIL

XSelect a Song Number

Press the [SEQUENCER] button to engage the sequencer. “SEQ” will

appear on the TEMPO display if the currently selected song contains no

data, or the measure number will appear if the song does contain data. The

number-1 indicator to the right of the [SONG SELECT] button will also

light.

If the sequencer contains previously recorded data, the green PLAY indi-

cators of tracks containing data will light when the sequencer is engaged.

Any of these tracks can be muted prior to engaging the record-ready mode

(below) by pressing the corresponding track button so that the green PLAY

indicator flashes.

The sequencer can also be engaged by pressing one of the track buttons, or by

pressing the [SONG SELECT] button.

The PSR-5700 sequencer can record up to 6 separate songs. Use the

[SONG SELECT] button to select the song number you want to record. The

selected song number is shown by the indicators, 1 through 6, to the right of

the [SONG SELECT] button.

CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PRO

SEQUENCER

SONG

SELECT

Recording

As you become more familiar with the PSR-5700 sequencer you’ll probably develop a recording procedure

that best suits your particular musical requirements. Here, to get you started, is the most simple, straightfor-

ward way to approach sequencer recording.

The PSR-5700 features an 8-track sequencer that allows you to record and play back original musi-

cal creations — along with auto accompaniment if required. You can record the accompaniment and

orchestra parts separately or at the same time. If, for example, you record the accompaniment first

and then record your own performance while listening to playback of the accompaniment, you’re free

to use the entire keyboard for your performance rather than being limited to only the upper keyboard

area. You can also play back each part independently or in any combination. For even further versatil-

ity, the PSR-5700 sequencer allows different songs to be saved to or re-loaded from floppy disk.

The Sequencer

CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

SEQUENCER

SONG

SELECT

123456

The Sequencer

Recordable Parameters

Tracks 1 — 7

• Note on/off

• Pitch bend

• Modulation

• Sustain on/off

• Orchestra 1 & 2 volume

• Voice change (including custom voice on/off)

• Tempo (if ACCOMP. track contains no data)

• Glide on/off

• Percussion pad on/off*

• Tempo pad tempo value*

• Multi pad on/off (phrase only)*

* The pad mode selected when the sequence

is played back will be used.

Accompaniment Track

• Chord & root (note on/off in Manual Bass

mode)

• Style change (styles with the same time

signature only)

• Rhythm volume

• Bass volume

• Chord 1 volume

• Chord 2 volume

• Tempo

• Reverb on/off & depth

• Reverb type

• Effect on/off & depth

• Effect type

• Effect control

• Harmony on/off and type

• Interactive Accompaniment on/off

• Interactive Accompaniment variation

• Interactive Accompaniment mode & sensitivity

• Auto Bass Chord mode

• Percussion Pad on/off

• Pad function (Multi/Tempo/Perc)

• Repeat/Synchro/Break on/off

• Manual bass on/off, voice

• Intro, fill in & ending

• Chord pad chord sequence

• Tempo pad tempo value

IMPORTANT

When the sequencer mode is engaged all previous panel settings are ignored.

If the record and playback pad modes are different, pad on/off events will not be

reproduced.

If parameter changes are memorized using the Voice Registration, Panel Regis-

tration, or Super Styleplay features during recording, only those parameters that

can be recorded on the current track will be memorized.

The time signature cannot be changed once a song has been recorded.

AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment can only be recorded on the

ACCOMP. track. The ORCH.1 and ORCH.2 voices can be recorded on any

of the remaining 7 tracks, but only one of these tracks can be recorded at a

time if the normal ORCH.1 orchestration is selected. If the ORCH.2+1 or

ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected, two record tracks must be selected

— the ORCH.1 voice will be recorded on the lower-numbered track while

the ORCH.2 voice will be recorded on the higher-numbered track. This

means that a maximum of three record tracks can be specified when the

ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected: ACCOMP. and any

two numbered tracks.

To select the record track(s) and engage the record-ready mode, hold the

[RECORD] button and press the appropriate track button(s). The red REC

indicator for the tracks will flash. Also note that the AUTO BASS CHORD

indicator will light automatically when the ACCOMP. track is selected.

DETAIL

HINT

The upper markings on the track buttons apply when the SEQUENCER mode is

engaged (1 through 7, and ACCOMP.). The lower markings when the CUSTOM

ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER described on page 15 is operating.

If you are adding new material to tracks that have already been recorded, the

[

] and [

] buttons can be used at this point to move to any measure number

from which you want to begin recording. The [

] and [

] buttons will not

function once recording has been started.

prf

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC

VSelect the Record Track(s)

The Sequencer

Recording will start as soon as the [START/RE-START] button is pressed or,

if you also press the [SYNCHRO START] button, as soon as any key on the key-

board is pressed.

If the ACCOMP. track is selected and you start recording by pressing the

[START/RE-START] button, only the rhythm will play until the first chord

(FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER) is played on the left-hand section of the key-

board.

If you start recording in the SYNCHRO START mode by playing on the right-

hand section of the keyboard, a metronome will sound in place of the rhythm and

AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment until a key is played on the left-hand

section of the keyboard.

Before starting recording you can also choose an introduction by pressing any of the

[INTRO.] buttons.

The restart function can not be used while the sequencer mode is engaged.

Previously recorded fill-ins may not always be erased if that section is re-recorded or

deleted.

Play the accompaniment and/or orchestra parts. The current measure number is

shown on the TEMPO display as you record.

Press the [STOP] button to stop recording immediately, or the [ENDING/rit.]

button to finish off the recording with an appropriate ending. The first measure of

the sequence is automatically selected when recording is stopped.

To record a new track, simply select a new voice and other parameters as re-

quired, select a new track as described in step 4, then record. All previously re-

corded tracks will automatically be set to the PLAY mode so you can record the

new material while listening to the material you’ve already recorded. Repeat this

procedure until your sequence is complete.

Up to approximately 7,000 notes can be recorded for all six sequencer songs. The

exact number of notes that can be recorded, however, will depend on the type of data

you record.

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

ENDING/

rit.

FILL IN

INTRO.3INTRO.2INTRO.1

BStart Recording

HINT

DETAIL

NPlay

MStop Recording

ENDING/

rit.

FILL IN

INTRO.3INTRO.2INTRO.1

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

<Record a New Track

DETAIL

Deleting Tracks

If you make a mistake while recording or simply want to delete a track from

your sequence, press the track button corresponding to the track you want to

delete while holding the [DELETE] button.

Tracks cannot be deleted during recording or playback.

prf

RD DELETE EDIT

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC

DETAIL

The Sequencer

ZStart Playback

Playback

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BA

1234567

PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY

prf

RECORD DELETE EDIT

Since tracks are automatically set to the PLAY mode once they have been

recorded, and tracks containing data are automatically set to the PLAY mode

when the sequencer is initially engaged by pressing the [SEQUENCER] button,

all you have to do to play back a sequence is to press the [START/RE-START]

button. If you first press the [SYNCHRO START] button, sequencer playback

can be started by playing any key on the keyboard.

Any of the PLAY tracks can be muted before or during playback by pressing

the corresponding track button. The PLAY indicator will flash when a track is

muted. Normal playback can be restored by pressing the track buttons of muted

tracks a second time (the PLAY indicator will light continuously).

Before starting playback you can use the [

] and [

] buttons to move to any

measure number from which you want to begin playback. The [

] button goes

directly to measure number 1.

If the Super Styleplay section change parameter (page 41) is turned ON during

ACCOMP. track playback, the Super Styleplay section will change in accordance

with accompaniment variation transitions and the result may be different from the

recorded data.

You can play along with the sequence using the entire PSR-5700 keyboard,

selecting different voices and changing the tempo as required (subsequently

recorded tempo changes will still take effect).

Parameters That Can Be Changed During Playback

• Style select (styles with different time signatures cannot be selected)

• Volume (rhythm, bass, chord 1 & chord 2)

• Tempo

• Reverb & effect on/off

• Pad repeat and break on/off

• Interactive Accompaniment on/off & accompaniment variation

(VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1, CHORUS 2, SOLO)

• Pad

• Some FUNCTION parameters (pages 26 through 58)

If changes to any of the above parameters are recorded in the sequence, the re-

corded changes will still take effect even if you manually change the parameters

while playing.

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the sequence is reached. At

this point the parameters recorded on the ACCOMP. track will revert to their

initial values. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the [STOP]

button.

Press the [EXIT] key to exit the sequencer mode and return to the normal

play mode. The sequencer mode can also be exited by pressing the [SE-

QUENCER] button.

HINT

DETAIL

CStop Playback

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

XPlay along If You Like

FUNCTION

EXIT

VPress [EXIT] When Done

Sequence Editing

prf

RECORD DELETE EDIT

DETAIL

+– +–

HARMONY

TYPE

OCTAVE

CHANGE

TRANSPOSE/

TUNE

A. B. C. MODE

`CONDITION/REC TYPE ‡

Metro=On Harmony=Key

The PSR-5700 sequencer edit mode offers a range of functions that let you modify the re-

corded data and the way in which it is recorded in a number of ways.

Press the [EDIT] button while the sequencer is engaged to enter the sequencer edit mode.

When you’re finished editing press the [EDIT] button again or press the [EXIT] button to return

to the sequencer.

The various functions in the sequencer edit mode are accessed by using the [s] and [t] but-

tons (these are the same as the [ABC MODE] and [HARMONY TYPE] buttons, respectively),

while the various display screens provided by each function are accessed by using the [<] and

[>] buttons (the [TRANSPOSE/TUNE] and [OCTAVE CHANGE] buttons, respectively).

The sequencer record and playback modes can not be engaged while in the edit mode.

The edit functions may not work if a large amount of sequence data has been recorded.

The Sequencer

DETAIL

E1 CONDITION/REC TYPE

Edit function 1 (“E1”) actually includes two separate functions: CONDITION and RECORD TYPE.

+– +–

`CONDITION/REC TYPE ‡

Metro=On Harmony=Key

● Condition

Purpose:

This display page allows the recording metronome sound

to be turned on or off, and determines whether harmony will

be applied to the keyboard or a track part.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn the metronome on

or off, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to select the harmony

part — “Key” or “Tr1” through “Tr7”.

Notes:

The metronome sound only appears during recording

when no rhythm is playing.

When the “Key” harmony setting is selected (this is the

default setting when the sequencer mode is engaged), har-

mony will be applied to notes played on the keyboard. If the

“Tr1” harmony setting is selected, harmony will be applied

to the track-1 part. If “Tr2” is selected harmony is applied to

track 2, and so on.

If Harmony is not turned on during recording, it will auto-

matically be turned off each time playback is stopped if it is

turned on before or during playback.

Harmony can only be applied to tracks that contain data.

The Sequencer

+–

† `REC TYPE

Mode=Replace

+– +–

† `REC TYPE ‡

Mode=Punch Play St= 1

+– +–

† `Punch IN/OUT MEAS.

In= 1 Out= 1

E2 VOLUME

+– +–

“VOL. 1~2'3~4'5~6'7~

99/81/99/81/99/81/99

● Recording Type

Purpose:

Selects the Replace, Overdub, or Punch record mode.

Procedure:

Press the [>] button to access the REC TYPE display. Use

the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the Replace, Overdub, or

Punch record mode:

• Replace

If replace recording is selected, any previous data on the

track being recorded will be erased and replaced by the

new material.

• Overdub

If overdub recording is selected, previous material on

that track will be retained and the new material will be

added to it.

• Punch

Punch-in recording allows a specified measure or range

of measures to be re-recorded (replaced) without affecting

previously recorded material before and after the punch-in

range.

When the Punch mode is selected you must also specify

the measure from which playback is to begin prior to the

“punch-in” point at which recording will actually begin

(Play St), the punch-in measure from which recording is

to begin (In), and the punch-out measure at which record-

ing is to end (Out). Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch

between these two display screens, and the associated [-]

and [+] buttons to specify the required measure numbers.

Notes:

It’s generally convenient to set the “Play St” measure in

the Punch mode to just a few measures before the punch-in

point. This allows you to get the feel of the music and pre-

pare to start playing at the punch-in point. You can even play

along with the material prior to the actual punch-in point so

you’ll flow naturally into the punch-in recording range.

A footswitch (the supplied FC5 footswitch can be used)

plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SW jack can also be used

to punch-in and punch-out when the footswitch “Punch In”

function is selected via the “FOOT SWITCH SELECT”

function described on page 37. With the sequencer running

in the Punch Record mode, press the footswitch at the point

you want to begin recording (i.e. to “punch in”), and again to

stop recording (punch out).

Please note that the punch-in record function can only be

used on tracks that already contain recorded material.

7, from left to right), then use either the left or right [-] and

[+] buttons to set the volume to a value between “00” (mini-

mum volume — no sound) and “99” (maximum volume).

Vertical bar-graphs to the right of each track number on the

top line of the display provide a graphic representation of the

track volume levels.

Notes:

Only tracks that contain data are available for volume

control.

Any recorded volume changes will override these settings.

Purpose:

This page lets you independently set the playback volume

of each of the sequencer’s seven orchestra tracks.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the

volume parameter of the track you want to adjust (1 through

E3 TRACK COPY/MIX

+– +–

£TRACK COPY/MIX ‡

Source1=Tr1 Source2=Tr2

+– +–

† £COPY/MIX Tr1+Tr2

Dest.=Tr1 Execute

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set

the first source track (Source1), the second source track

(Source2), and the destination track (Dest.). If

“CopyToDest.” is selected for the Source2 parameter, only

the Source1 track is copied to the destination track.

Once the source and destination tracks have been selected,

press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the

display to actually execute the mixdown operation. “Se-

quencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the

display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!”

will appear briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the

mixdown if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is

only available until the next operation is performed.

Notes:

The mix function is most useful when you want to record

more than 7 individual parts on the seven orchestra-part

tracks. Successfully recorded parts can be combined using

this function, thus opening up more tracks for further record-

ing. The data in the source tracks is not erased during a mix

operation.

If the tracks that are mixed use different voices, the voice

of the lower-numbered track will be used. Subsequent re-

corded voice changes will operate normally.

Please note that only tracks containing data can be speci-

fied as the source tracks.

Any data in the destination track will be overwritten by

data copied from the source 1 and 2 tracks.

Purpose:

Copies the data from one recorded track to another, or

mixes the data from two recorded tracks (except the

ACCOMP. track).

The Sequencer

Data

Copy to Destination track

● Copy

Source track 1

● Mix

Source track 1

Source track 2

Destination track (mix result)











 







The Sequencer

E4 QUANTIZE

+– +–

¢QUANTIZE 1/32 ‡

Track=Tr1 Execute

+– +–

† ¢QUANTIZE Tr1

Size=1/32 Execute

eeee eee

eeeeeeee

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the

quantize operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo

function is only available until the next operation is per-

formed.

The Quantize Sizes are:

1/4 = 1/4 note

1/6 = 1/4 note triplet

1/8 = 1/8 note

1/12 = 1/8 note triplet

1/16 = 1/16 note

1/24 = 1/16 note triplet

1/32 = 1/32 note

1/96 = maximum resolution

(default)

Notes:

Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing.

Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too per-

fect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course,

you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical feel. Al-

ways use a quantize value that is at least as “short” as the

shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a

track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example,

some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats,

thus ruining the track.

Purpose:

Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified

beat.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left [-] and [+] buttons to set the

track number (Track) and the quantize size (Size).

Once the track number and quantize size have been se-

lected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side

of the display to actually execute the quantize operation.

“Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the

display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!”

will appear briefly when the operation has finished.

+– +–

DELETE ALL TRACKS ‡

TopMeas= 4 LastMeas= 6

† DELETE from 4 to 6

Execute

E5 DELETE ALL TRACKS

123456789

123 789

123456

Measure 4 through 6 deleted.

Delete Measures 4 through 6.

Subsequent measures moved back.

Purpose:

Deletes the specified measure or range of measures from

all tracks (including the accompaniment track).

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons in the

first display screen to specify the number of the first measure

in the range to be deleted (TopMeas) and the number of the

last measure in the range to be deleted (LastMeas).

Once the top and last measure numbers have been se-

lected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side

of the second display screen to actually execute the delete

operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower

line of the display while the operation is in progress, and

“Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has

finished.

Notes:

It’s important to remember that a delete operation affects

all tracks simultaneously, and that measures following the

deleted range are moved back to take the place of the deleted

measures. This differentiates the delete job from the erase

job (described later), which replaces data in the specified

range with rests.

Be careful when deleting measures that contain effect on/

off events — e.g. pitch bend, modulation, sustain, harmony,

etc. If, for example, you delete a measure that contains a

pitch bend off event, the pitch bend applied in a previous

measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event

is encountered.

The delete operation has no “undo” function, so be abso-

lutely sure you want to delete the selected material before

actually executing the delete operation.

The Sequencer

+– +–

†ƒERASE Tr1 from 4

LastMeas= 6 Execute

The Sequencer

E7 ERASE

+– +–

ƒERASE ‡

Track=Tr1 TopMeas= 4

E6 INSERT ALL TRACKS

+– +–

⁄INSERT ALL TRACKS ‡

TopMeas= 6 Size= 3

†⁄INSERT from 6size 3

Execute

123456

12345 6

123456789

Insert measure, size 3, at measure 6.

Measure 6 moved up; 3 blank measures inserted.

Result with new measure numbers.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set

the track number (Track), the number of the first measure in

the range to be erased (TopMeas), and the number of the last

measure in the range to be erased (LastMeas).

Once the track and measure numbers have been selected,

press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the

display to actually execute the erase operation. “Sequencer

Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display

while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will

appear briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the erase

operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is

only available until the next operation is performed.

Notes:

An erase operation leaves the specified measures intact but

blank.

Purpose:

Erases all note and event (pitch bend, volume changes,

etc.) data from the specified measure or range of measures in

the specified track (accompaniment track not available),

leaving blank measures.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons in the

first display screen to specify the number of the measure at

which the blank measures are to be inserted (TopMeas) and

the number of blank measures to be inserted (Size).

Once the top measure number and size have been selected,

press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the

second display screen to actually execute the insert opera-

tion. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of

the display while the operation is in progress, and “Com-

pleted!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished.

Notes:

Insert affects all tracks simultaneously. The specified

number of blank measures is inserted before the existing data

beginning at the specified insert measure number.

The insert operation has no “undo” function.

Purpose:

Inserts a specified number of blank measures in all tracks

(including the accompaniment track) at the specified meas-

ure number.

123456789

TRACK 1

123456789

TRACK 1

Erase measures 4 through 6.

Measures 4 — 6 “blank, ”

containing only rests.

+– +–

†¥REMOV Tr1 PB ‡

TopMeas= 3 LastMeas= 4

+–

†¥REMOV Tr1 PB 3> 4

Execute

E8 REMOVE EVENT

+– +–

¥REMOVE EVENT ‡

Track=Tr1 Event=PB

Purpose:

Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (pitch

bend, modulation wheel, volume, or sustain operations) from

the specified measure or range of measures in the specified

track (accompaniment track not available).

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set

the track number (Track), the type of event to be removed

(Event), the number of the first measure in the range from

which the events are to be removed (TopMeas), and the

number of the last measure in the range from which the

events are to be removed (LastMeas).

Once the track, event, and measure numbers have been

specified, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right

side of the display to actually execute the remove event op-

eration. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower

line of the display while the operation is in progress, and

“Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has

finished.

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the re-

move event operation if it was executed by mistake. The

undo function is only available until the next operation is

performed.

The Event Abbreviations are:

PB = Pitch Bend

MOD = Modulation Wheel

VOL = Volume

SUS = Sustain

VC = Voice Change

Notes:

This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played

some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can re-

move only the offending pitch bends without erasing the

entire track.

Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for

example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a specified

measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will

remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encoun-

tered. Similarly, if you remove all program change events

from the beginning of a track, the voice that was initially

selected when the track was recorded will be used.

The Sequencer

`…SONG 1 CLEAR

FREE:31k Execute

+– +–

»NOTE SHIFT ‡

Track=Tr1 Shift=+12

+– +–

†»NOTE Tr1 +12 ‡

TopMeas= 1 LastMeas= 16

+–

†»NOTE Tr1 1> 16 +12

Execute

E9 NOTE SHIFT

The Sequencer

E10 SONG CLEAR

Once the track, shift, and measure numbers have been

specified, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right

side of the display to actually execute the note shift opera-

tion. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of

the display while the operation is in progress, and “Com-

pleted!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the note

shift operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo func-

tion is only available until the next operation is performed.

Notes:

The range of “Shift” values is from -24 to +24. A setting

of “0” produces no note shift. Each increment represents a

semitone, so a setting of +4, for example, would shift the

pitch of notes in the specified range up by an interval of a

third. A setting of -12 would shift the notes down by one

octave.

The ability to selectively shift the pitch of specified meas-

ures and tracks makes it simple to create “modulations” (key

changes) without having to reprogram entire passages, and to

create simple harmonies.

Purpose:

Shifts the pitch of notes in the specified measures of the

specified track (accompaniment track not available) up or

down by a maximum of two octaves, in semitone increments.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set

the track number (Track), the amount of note shift (Shift —

see “Notes” below), the number of the first measure in the

range in which the notes are to be shifted (TopMeas), and the

number of the last measure in the range in which the notes

are to be shifted (LastMeas).

Notes:

Remember that this function deletes all data in the se-

quencer in one operation. If you think you might want to

keep the data for later use or editing, be sure to save it to

floppy disk (page 42, 46) before executing the song clear

operation. Be careful with SONG CLEAR — it has no

“undo” function!

The remaining amount of sequencer memory is shown on

the bottom line of the display in kilobytes.

Purpose:

Deletes the entire song — i.e. deletes all data from all

sequencer tracks.

Procedure:

Press the [+] button below “Execute” on the display to

execute the song clear operation. “Completed!” will appear

briefly when the operation has finished.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

The PSR-5700 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT feature allows you to create and store up to six original accompa-

niments — including rhythm, bass, and chords — in addition to 36 internal preset accompaniment styles. You can

even create intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that can be saved with your accompaniments. More custom accom-

paniments can be created and saved to floppy disk (page 42, 46). Your original accompaniments can be selected

and played at any time, just like the presets.

Select a Suitable Accompani-

ment Style

Engage the Custom Accom-

paniment Programmer

STYLE SELECT

012345

NUMBER

012345

BANK

CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

SEQUENCER

SONG

SELECT

12345

Begin by selecting one of the preset accompaniment styles that is close to

the type of accompaniment you want to create. For example, select a

WALTZ accompaniment style if you want to program a rhythm pattern in

3/4 time.

Press the [CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER] button.

The selected accompaniment style will begin playing, with accompaniment

based on a C major chord. Also, the rhythm track will be set to the record

mode (red REC indicator lit) and the 98 DRUM KIT voice will be selected.

All other tracks containing data will be set to the PLAY mode (green PLAY

indicator lit). PLAY tracks can be muted by pressing the corresponding

track button (the green PLAY indicator will flash when the track is muted).

Use the [VERSE1], [VERSE2], [CHORUS1], [CHORUS2], and [SOLO]

buttons to select the accompaniment variation you want to program (varia-

tions cannot be selected when a custom style is selected).

Intro, fill-in, and ending patterns will be based on the selected variation.

If you delete all existing data to program an accompaniment from scratch,

and change the time signature (beat), the intro, fill-in, and ending patterns

cannot be used.

Since the RHYTHM track is initially set to the REC mode and the 98

DRUM KIT voice is selected, you can start programming the RHYTHM

track immediately.

You can add new notes to the rhythm by playing the keys corresponding

to the PSR-5700 drums and percussion instruments. The drums and percus-

sion instruments produced are indicated by the symbols immediately above

the keys (see the “KEYBOARD PERCUSSION KEYS” chart on page 14 of

the “Getting Started” manual). Please note that pitch bend can not be ap-

plied to the rhythm instruments.

Basic Programming Procedure

Although many of the steps outlined below do not have to be carried out in the order given, the basic pro-

gramming procedure presented below will serve as useful guide to get you started.

Select an Accompaniment

Variation

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

VProgram the Rhythm Part

prf

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

If you want to create a totally new rhythm track, press the RHYTHM

track button while holding the [DELETE] button. This cancels all the in-

struments in the original rhythm track, leaving only a metronome sound

(the metronome sound will not be heard while the rhythm is playing). The

rhythm pattern can be up to 8 measures long (see “1. CUSTOM ACCOMP.

Measure/Beat” on page 19), and the pattern will continue to repeat so you

can add new instruments during each repeat, if necessary.

To Cancel A Single Percussion Instrument

Although you can cancel all instruments in the RHYTHM track by pressing

the RHYTHM track button while holding the [DELETE] button, it is also

possible to cancel a single instrument to eradicate a mistake or simply

eliminate an unwanted instrument. While holding the CANCEL key (the

highest key on the PSR-5700 keyboard), press the percussion key corre-

sponding to the instrument you want to cancel. The selected instrument

should now be cleared from the pattern.

If you can’t cancel an instrument even after following the above procedure,

switch to VOICE SELECT number 8 or 9 and try again.

To Add Accents

To accent specific beats after recording the rhythm, press the accent key

(the second to highest key on the keyboard, with the “>” symbol) at the

timing of beats you want to accent.

After the RHYTHM track has been programmed (or it can be left as it is

if no changes are required), you can select a bass or chord track for pro-

gramming by pressing the BASS or a CHORD track button while holding

the [RECORD] button (tracks containing preset data cannot be selected for

recording). The RHYTHM track will automatically switch to the PLAY

mode when a new REC track is specified. Please remember that only one

track can be programmed at a time.

prf

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC

CANCEL

HINT

Program the Bass and Chord

Parts

prf

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC

Play notes or chords to be added to the existing data, or delete all data on

the track (press the track button while holding the [DELETE] button) and

start from scratch. The bass and chord tracks must be programmed in the

key of C major!

Continue selecting new record tracks and variations, and program until

your custom accompaniment is complete.

Unwanted tracks can be deleted from the accompaniment by holding the [DE-

LETE] button and pressing the appropriate track button.

Although the bass and chord tracks must be programmed in C major, they are

automatically re-harmonized when the custom accompaniment is used in the

play mode, and can be used in any key, major or minor.

When programming an accompaniment from scratch, you can select a new

voice that will take effect from the beginning of the accompaniment after delet-

ing all tracks. Other voice changes added while programming will take effect

from the point at which they are made.

The synchro start, start, and stop functions can be used when recording a

custom accompaniment. The re-start function, however, cannot be used.

Pitch bend, modulation, and sustain changes are not recorded if the accompa-

niment is stopped — the accompaniment must be running for parameter

changes to be recorded.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer memory capacity is limited. When

the available memory for the track you are recording is exhausted, the “Work

Area Full !!” display will appear and further recording on that track will be impos-

sible unless existing data is deleted. Further, if the data size is too big when you

perform a save operation, “Memory Area Full!!/ Can not Save” will appear on

the display.

Only preset voices 00 through 89 can be used to record bass and chord parts

(custom voices cannot be used).

If necessary, set a new default tempo for the custom accompaniment by

using the TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons.

Work Area Full !!

Memory Area Full!!

Can not Save

HINT

DETAIL

NSet a New Default Tempo

DETAIL

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

+– +–

SAVE ßCancel´

Set to=Cus0 No Yes

+– +–

¢NAME

Big Band

SAVE TO ACCOMP.

Set to=Cus0 -Execute-

+– +–

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Give the Finished Accompa-

niment a Name and Assign it

to a CUSTOM Number

Use the “4. NAME” function described on page 20 to give your custom

accompaniment an original name, then use the “5. SAVE TO ACCOMP.”

function described on page 20 to assign the accompaniment to a CUSTOM

number and exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer mode.

Please note that if you attempt to exit from the Custom Accompaniment Pro-

grammer by pressing the [EXIT], [SEQUENCER], or [CUSTOM ACCOMP PRO-

GRAMMER] button, the confirmation display shown to the left will appear:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the custom accompaniment

number to which the accompaniment is to be stored (C0 through C5), then

press the [+] button under “YES” on the display to store the accompani-

ment. Press the [-] button under “NO” on the display to exit from the Cus-

tom Accompaniment Programmer without storing the data. You can also

press both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously to cancel the store opera-

tion and return to the Custom Accompaniment Programmer if you want to

make a few more changes or additions to the accompaniment before storing.

IMPORTANT

Using a Custom Accompaniment

HINT

IMPORTANT

STYLE SELECT

0 DISK12345

NUMBER

0 CUSTOM12345

BANK

Once created and stored, your original accompaniment can be selected

and used in the same way as the preset accompaniment styles.

Press the [CUSTOM] button and then the appropriate STYLE SELECT

NUMBER button (0 through 5) to select a custom accompaniment — C0,

C1, C2, C3, C4, or C5. The selected custom accompaniment can then be

operated just like any of the preset accompaniment styles — it can be

started and stopped as usual, and can be used in the FINGERED or SIN-

GLE FINGER AUTO BASS CHORD modes.

To select a preset accompaniment style after selecting a custom accompani-

ment, use the STYLE SELECT buttons in the normal way.

Interactive Accompaniment cannot be used with custom accompaniments.

Custom Accompaniment Editing

The PSR-5700 Custom Accompaniment Programmer offers a range of functions that let

you modify the recorded data in a number of ways. The various Custom Accompaniment

Programmer functions are accessed by using the [s] and [t] buttons, while the various

display screens provided by each function are accessed by using the [<] and [>] buttons.

1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. (Measure/Beat)

+– +–

`CUSTOM ACCOMP. Normal

Measure:4 Beat:4

2 VOLUME

+– +–

“VOL. 1~2~3~4~5~6~B~R~

15/15/15/15/15/15/15/15

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to specify the numbers of

measures the accompaniment is to have (from 1 to 8), and

the right [-] and [+] buttons to specify the number of beats

per measure — from “3” to “5”.

Notes:

These parameters can only be changed when you’re creat-

ing an entirely new pattern from scratch — i.e. you have

deleted all tracks from the original accompaniment by hold-

ing the [DELETE] button and pressing the buttons of all

tracks containing data so that no PLAY indicators remain lit.

The INTRO, FILL, and ENDING variations must also be

empty.

FILL patterns can have a maximum length of 1 measure.

Purpose:

This display page allows the length (in measures) and time

signature of the accompaniment to be defined when the Cus-

tom Accompaniment mode is initially engaged.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the

volume parameter of the track you want to adjust (1 through

6, “B” for BASS, and “R” for RHYTHM, from left to right),

then use either the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the

volume to a value between “0” (minimum volume — no

sound) and “15” (maximum volume). Vertical bar-graphs to

the right of each track number on the top line of the display

provide a graphic representation of the track volume levels.

Notes:

Only tracks that contain data are available for volume

control.

Purpose:

This page lets you independently set the volume of each of

the Custom Accompaniment Programmer’s tracks.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

+– +–

¢NAME

Big Band

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

3 FADER SELECT

+– +–

£FADER SELECT

C1` C2` C3` C4“ C5“ C6“

—

4 NAME

5 SAVE TO ACCOMP.

+– +–

SAVE TO ACCOMP.

Set to=Cus0 -Execute-

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the

chord track you want to assign (C1 through C6), then use the

left or right [-] and [+] buttons to assign either “1” (the

CHORD 1 volume control) or “2” (the CHORD 2 volume

control) to the selected chord track.

Notes:

It is a good idea to group the chord tracks according to

their musical function. For example, tracks containing basic

block chords could be assigned to the CHORD 1 control

while tracks containing more “decorative” chord work could

be assigned to the CHORD 2 control.

Purpose:

Assigns the CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 volume controls to

Custom Accompaniment Programmer CHORD tracks 1

through 6, determining which control affects which chord

tracks when the accompaniment is played back.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to move the underline cursor

to the various character positions, then use the left [-] and [+]

buttons to select the required character for each position.

Notes:

Independent names can not be assigned to INTRO, FILL,

and ENDING patterns. Here’s a list of the characters that can

be selected via the left [-] and [+] buttons.

Character list

[Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥

Purpose:

Allows a name of up to 8 characters to be assigned to the

current custom accompaniment before it is stored via the

following “5. SAVE TO ACCOMP.” function.

Procedure:

The “Set to” parameter in the first display screen deter-

mines to which custom accompaniment number the accom-

paniment will be stored — Cus0, Cus1, Cus2, Cus3, Cus4, or

Cus5. When the “Set to” parameter has been set as required

by using the left [-] and [+] buttons, press the right [-] and

[+] buttons under “-Execute-” on the display to actually store

the current custom accompaniment in the specified custom

accompaniment number. “Completed” will appear when the

operation is complete.

Purpose:

This function stores the current custom accompaniment to

a specified custom accompaniment number.

6 QUANTIZE

+– +–

⁄QUANTIZE 1/32 ‡

Track=Rhythm Execute

+– +–

†⁄QUANTIZE Rhythm

Size=1/32 Execute

eeee eee

eeeeeeee

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

Purpose:

Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified

beat.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left [-] and [+] buttons to set the

track number (Track) and the quantize size (Size).

Once the track number and quantize size have been se-

lected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side

of the display to actually execute the quantize operation.

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the

quantize operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo

function is only available until the next operation is per-

formed.

The Quantize Sizes are:

1/4 = 1/4 note

1/6 = 1/4 note triplet

1/8 = 1/8 note

1/12 = 1/8 note triplet

1/16 = 1/16 note

1/24 = 1/16 note triplet

1/32 = 1/32 note

Notes:

Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing.

Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too per-

fect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course,

you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical feel. Al-

ways use a quantize value that is at least as “short” as the

shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a

track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example,

some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats,

thus ruining the track.

Quantization can not be applied to tracks containing preset

data. If you attempt to quantize a track containing preset

(including disk style) data, “!” will appear on the display in

place of “=”.











 







The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

7 COPY

12345678

12341278

+– +–

ƒCOPY ‡

Track=Rhythm TopMeas=1

+– +–

†ƒCOPY Rhythm 1- ‡

LastMeas=2 Meas=5

+–

†ƒCOPY Rhythm 1-2>5

Execute

Copy measures 1 through 2 to measure 5 in

the same track.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons in the

various screens to specify the track number (Track), the

number of the first measure of the range to be copied

(TopMeas), the number of last measure of the range to be

copied (LastMeas), and the number of the measure (Meas) to

which the data is to be copied.

Once the track numbers and measure numbers have been

selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right

side of the third display screen to actually execute the copy

operation.

Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the

right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the copy

operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is

only available until the next operation is performed.

Notes:

A copy operation overwrites the data from the beginning

of the specified destination measure with the data from the

source measure(s). Previous data in the overwritten measures

is therefore lost.

The COPY function cannot be used with tracks containing

preset data.

Purpose:

Copies a specified measure or range of measures to a dif-

ferent location within the same track.

+– +–

»CHANGE PATTERN

Pattern=I/F/E: Intro

9 CHANGE PATTERN

Purpose:

Selects the Normal or Intro/Fill/Ending accompaniment

pattern for editing.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select either “Normal”

if you want to edit the normal accompaniment pattern, or

“I/F/E” if you want to edit the INTRO, FILL or ENDING

pattern. If you select “I/F/E”, the next step is to use the

right [-] and [+] buttons to select “Intro”, “Fill” or “End-

ing”.

Once the desired pattern has been selected, go back to

the preceding screens and create your custom accompani-

ment.

+– +–

¥REMOVE EVENT ‡

Track=Rhythm Event:VOL

8 REMOVE EVENT

+–

†¥REMOVE Rhythm VOL

Execute

Immediately after execution “UndoExecute” will appear

above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to

undo the remove event operation if it was executed by mis-

take. The undo function is only available until the next op-

eration is performed.

The Event Abbreviations are:

PB = Pitch Bend

MOD = Modulation Wheel

VOL = Volume

SUS = Sustain

Notes:

This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played

some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can re-

move only the offending pitch bends without erasing the

entire track.

Only the VOL event type can be selected when the

RHYTHM tracks is selected.

Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for

example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a specified

measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will

remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encoun-

tered.

The REMOVE EVENT function cannot be used with

tracks containing preset data.

Purpose:

Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (vol-

ume, sustain, pitch bend, or modulation wheel operations)

from the specified track.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set

the track number (Track) and the type of event to be re-

moved (Event).

Once the track and event have been specified, press the [+]

button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to

actually execute the remove event operation.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

● CREATING INTRO, FILL-IN, & ENDING PATTERNS

The custom accompaniment programmer allows you to create one set of intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that can be saved and

later used with custom accompaniments Cus0 … 5 (see “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” in step 7 for more details).

SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING‡

Return

+– +–

† SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING

Style=Cus0 = User

DETAIL

HINT

■ EDITING A PRESET INTRO, FILL-IN, OR

ENDING PATTERN

1. Select the preset style that your custom accompaniment

is to be based on.

2. Go to the “5 SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen and save the

accompaniment to a custom accompaniment number

(Cus0 … 5).

When this is done any custom accompaniment data

previously saved in the same location will be overwritten!

3. Use the [CUSTOM] and [NUMBER] buttons to select

the custom accompaniment you saved in the preceding

step.

4. Go to the “9 CHANGE PATTERN” screen and use the

left [-] and [+] buttons to select “I/F/E”, then use the

right [-] and [+] buttons to select “Intro,” “FillIn,” or

“Ending.”

5. After selecting the type of pattern to be programmed, go

to any other custom edit screen and program the pattern

using the standard custom accompaniment programming

procedure.

6. When the pattern is complete, go to the “5 SAVE TO

ACCOMP” screen and save the pattern.

If you go to the “9 CHANGE PATTERN” screen and

select a different “Pattern,” the screen you need to save

the pattern you created in step 5 will appear

automatically. Press the [+] button under “YES” on the

display and the pattern will be saved.

7. At this point the “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen

will appear. Shift to the second screen and use the left

and right [-] and [+] buttons to select “User” for the cus-

tom accompaniment numbers with which you want to

use your original intro/fill/ending patterns.

Shift back to the first screen and press the [+] button

under “RETURN” on the display to return to the “5

SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen.

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create other patterns.

If you select “Preset” in the “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING”

screen, then the un-edited intro, fill-in and ending patterns

of the original preset style will be used with the selected

custom style. If you select “NoAssign”, then no intro, fill-in,

or ending patterns will be used. In this case the [INTRO]

button functions in the same way as the [START] button,

the [ENDING] button functions in the same way as the

[STOP] button, and the [FILL IN] button has no effect.

If the user patterns have a different time signature than

the custom accompaniment patterns, then “User” cannot

be selected in the “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen.

The “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen appears auto-

matically when an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern is saved,

or when “I/F/E” is reset to “Normal” in the “9 CHANGE

PATTERN” screen.

To prevent differences between the time signatures of the

intro, fill-in, and ending patterns, all the patterns for the

selected styles are saved simultaneously when any one

pattern is saved. For example, if you edit an intro pattern

while a preset style is selected and then save the intro

pattern, the fill-in and ending patterns for the selected

style will also be saved. If you then edit and save the fill-in

pattern, the intro and ending patterns will also be saved,

meaning the intro pattern you just saved will be

overwritten. To prevent this, first copy the preset style to a

custom style number, as described in steps 1 through 3,

above, and then use this as a basis for your new patterns.

Of course, you must be careful that you don’t overwrite a

previously saved custom accompaniment style when

doing this.

IMPORTANT

+– +–

SAVE TO ACCOMP.

Set to:I/F/E No Yes

DETAIL

+– +–

»CHANGE PATTERN

Pattern=I/F/E: Intro

HINT

● EXITING FROM THE CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT MODE

DETAIL

+– +–

SAVE ßCancel´

Set to=Cus0 No Yes

+–

SAVE ßCancel´

Set to:I/F/E No Yes

■ EDITING A PREVIOUSLY SAVED USER

INTRO, FILL-IN, OR ENDING PATTERN

To edit intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that you have

previously created and saved, simply select the custom ac-

companiment to which the user patterns are assigned (Cus0

… 5) and follow steps 4 through 8, above.

■ CREATING A NEW INTRO, FILL-IN, OR

ENDING PATTERN

After selecting an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern as de-

scribed in step 4, above, use the [DELETE] button to delete

all data from all tracks. Then follow steps 5 through 8 to

create your original pattern.

To create an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern with a differ-

ent time signature, go to the “1 CUSTOM ACCOMP” screen

and set the “BEAT” parameter as required. If you delete and

save the intro pattern, the fill-in pattern, and the ending pat-

tern, the “1 CUSTOM ACCOMP” screen will appear auto-

matically no matter what pattern edit mode you’re in, and

you can set the “BEAT” parameter as required.

Use the synchro start function when you want to enter data

precisely on the first beat of the first measure.

To exit from the custom accompaniment mode, press ei-

ther the [CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER]

or [EXIT] button. This will return you to the normal play

mode.

If you have not performed a save operation via the “5

SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen after performing any other

operation in the custom accompaniment mode, however, the

following display will appear automatically when you exit

from the custom accompaniment mode:

To save the edited data before exiting, use the left [-] and

[+] buttons to select the destination custom accompaniment

number, and then press the [+] button below “YES” on the

display. If you want to exit without saving, simply press the

[-] button below “NO” on the display.

You can return to the custom accompaniment mode by press-

ing both the right [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

If you attempt to exit after programming an intro, fill-in,

or ending pattern, the following display will appear:

From this display you will exit to the “SET INTRO/FILL/

ENDING” display, from which you can exit as described

above.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Other Functions

+– +–

HARMONY

TYPE

OCTAVE

CHANGE

TRANSPOSE/

TUNE

A. B. C. MODE

“COMMON ……Piano 1 ‡

PitBend=0 TouchSens=0

FUN

EXIT

F1: CUSTOM VOICE EDIT

F2: REVERB / EFFECT

F3: CONTROLLER / KEY VELOCITY

F4: SPLIT POINT / I.A. / S.S.P.MODE

F5: DISK

F6: UTILITY / MIDI

FUNCTION

EXIT

The PSR-5700 [FUNCTION] button selects 6 groups of functions that access single or

multiple display “pages” of parameters. Here’s a list of the functions and the manual page

numbers on which they are described in detail.

[F1] Custom Voice Edit ..........................27

[F2] Reverb Type ...................................35

Effect Type ......................................36

[F3] Controller ........................................37

Key Velocity ....................................37

[F4] Split Point ........................................40

Interactive Accompaniment.............40

Super Style Play Mode ...................41

[F5] Disk .................................................42

[F6] Utility ...............................................49

MIDI ................................................50

General Function Selection & Editing Procedure

The left and right arrows select

other parameters within the same

page (if available).

The up and down arrows select

different display “pages.”

These buttons set the

right parameter*.

These buttons set the

left parameter.

■ The [EXIT] Button

Each of the function groups selected by the [FUNCTION] button includes several display

“pages.” These are accessed by using the [s] and [t] buttons. Furthermore, in some cases a

display page have more parameters than fit in a single screen. The different screens are

accessed by using the [<] and [>] buttons.

Each display screen will have a maximum of two parameters, and these can be adjusted by

using the [-] and [+] buttons immediately below each parameter. Pressing both the [-] and [+]

buttons simultaneously will generally set the “normal” value for the selected parameter.

* Some functions have only one parameter which will be shown to the left of the display. In such

cases the right [-] and [+] buttons will have no effect.

The [EXIT] button can be used at any time to exit from a function and return to the normal

play mode.

“Not Available in SEQ!” may appear on the lower display line when a function button is pressed in the

sequencer, custom accompaniment programmer, DOC, or GM mode (depending on the mode, “SEQ”

in the display may be replaced by “CUS”, “DOC”, or “GM”). If this message appears, the selected func-

tion cannot be accessed or edited.

DETAIL

The Custom Voice Edit mode allows you to edit any of the PSR-5700 voices to create new sounds

that ideally match your own music style. 100 custom voices — 00 through 99 — can be programmed,

each based on the correspondingly-numbered preset voice.

After selecting the voice you want to edit*, engage the Custom Voice Edit mode by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button so that “F1” appears on the TEMPO display. Use the various editing functions

described below to modify the sound to suit your needs. Then press the [EXIT] button when you’re

finished editing to return to the normal play mode.

Your custom voices can be selected and played by pressing the [CUSTOM VOICE] button and

using the VOICE SELECT buttons in the normal way (the custom voice numbers are displayed in

reversed letters).

* You can also select a different voice while the Custom Voice Edit mode is engaged via the VOICE SELECT buttons. In this

case the normal voice selection display will appear while the VOICE SELECT buttons are being used, and for a few seconds

afterwards. The display will then revert to the previous Custom Voice Edit display page.

Please note that some voices may suddenly shift to a different octave or change in level when played on the highest or

lowest keys. There may also be slight tonal changes at one or more points on the keyboard.

The preset value can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

Some settings may produce noise or no sound.

DETAIL

[F1] Custom Voice Edit

HINT

DETAIL

Standard Voice Edit Functions (Voices 00 through 89)

The following functions are available when editing voices 00 through 89. Different groups of

edit functions are provided for the PSR-5700 dual voices (90 through 97 — page 30) and drum

voices (98 and 99 — page 33).

For all parameters described here the preset value can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and

[+] buttons simultaneously.

DETAIL

+–

`NAME

……:Piano 1

1 NAME

Character list

[Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥

Notes:

It’s a good idea to give your voices names that make them

easily identifiable. If you’ve created a new voice that is a

variation on the standard piano voice, for example, you could

call it something like “PianVar”.

Purpose:

Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the voice.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the

desired character location, then use the left [-] and [+] but-

tons to select the desired character. A chart of the available

characters is given below.

[F1] Custom Voice Edit

+– +–

£MODULATION ……Piano 1

Depth= 0 Speed= 0

+– +–

†“COMMON ……Piano 1

Oct=Normal Pan=L R

+– +–

“COMMON ……Piano 1 ‡

PitBend=2 TouchSens=2

2 COMMON

COMMON includes two display screens covering a range of parameters that affect the entire voice.

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons

below each parameter to set the required values.

DETAIL

3 MODULATION

The two parameters provided in this screen are used to adjust the depth and speed of

modulation produced by the PSR-5700 MODULATION/EFFECT wheel.

Use the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values.

● Octave (Oct)

Shifts the pitch of the voice up one octave (1up) or

down one octave (1down). A setting of “normal” produces

the normal pitch for that voice.

Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the highest

and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted up or down by

an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also cause sudden pitch

changes.

● Pan

Sets the apparent position of the voice in the stereo

sound field. The graphic display indicates the approximate

location of the sound between the left and right speakers.

When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan position

of the selected voice is used. The center pan position can be

recalled immediately by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

● Pitch Bend Range (PitBend)

Sets the range of the pitch bend wheel to “0” (OFF), “1”

(±1 semitone), “2” (±2 semitones), “3” (±3 semitones), or

“Glis” (maximum 1-octave glissando in semitone steps).

● Touch Sensitivity (TouchSens)

Allows the touch sensitivity of the keyboard to be set to

three different levels, or turned off: “0” (OFF), “1”, “2” ,

or “3”.

● Modulation Depth

Decreases (-) or increases (+) the depth of modulation

produced by the PSR-5700 MODULATION/EFFECT

wheel relative to the original modulation depth of the

selected voice.

● Modulation Speed

Decreases (-) or increases (+) the speed of modulation

produced by the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel relative

to the original modulation speed of the selected voice.

Notes:

The maximum range of the depth and speed is from -7

through 0 to +7, although this range is more limited with

some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the

parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting

for the selected voice has been reached.

The default modulation depth and speed values for the

selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. Minus set-

tings produce gentler or slower modulation, while plus set-

tings produce deeper or faster modulation, respectively.

Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons below a parameter im-

mediately recalls the default value (“0”).

Modulation is applied automatically to some voices, and

in some cases operating the wheel causes modulation to be

applied automatically.

+– +–

¢EG RATE ……Piano 1 ‡

Attack= 0! Decay= 0

+– +–

†¢EG RATE ……Piano 1

Release= 0 Sustain= 0

4 EG RATE

Key

Pressed

Key

Released

Level

Time

Attack

Decay

Release

Sustain

The attack, decay, sustain, and release parameters provided here let you

shape the volume envelope of the voice.

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens,

and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values.

● Sustain

Sets the speed of sustain decay — i.e. how fast the

sound decays after a key is released when the panel [SUS-

TAIN] button is on or the sustain pedal is pressed.

“0” sets the normal sustain for the selected voice, minus

settings produce a longer sustain decay, and plus settings

produce a faster sustain decay.

Notes:

The maximum range for all parameters is from -50

through 0 to +50, although this range is more limited with

some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the

parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting

for the selected voice has been reached.

The default values for the selected voice are produced by

settings of “0”. Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons below a

parameter immediately recalls the default value (“0”).

With voices like 21 STRINGS, in which key velocity (keyboard

dynamics) controls the speed of attack, attack speed changes

in the same way even if the attack parameter is set to a minus

value.

Since PIANO 1 (00) and some other voices already have

the fastest possible attack, no sound will be produced if the

Decay parameter for such voices is set to “+50.”

The Decay parameter will have no effect on some sustain-

type voices which have no inherent decay.

Changing the EG rate parameter may have no effect on the

sound with some voices.

● Attack

Sets the speed of attack — i.e. how fast the sound

reaches maximum level after a key is pressed.

“0” sets the normal attack for the selected voice, minus

settings produce a slower attack, and plus settings produce

a faster attack.

● Decay

Sets the speed of decay portion of the envelope — i.e.

how fast the sound decays from the maximum attack level

to its normal level.

“0” sets the normal decay for the selected voice, minus

settings produce a slower decay, and plus settings produce

a faster decay.

● Release

Sets the speed of release — i.e. how fast the sound de-

cays after a key is released when the panel [SUSTAIN]

button is off and the sustain pedal is not pressed.

“0” sets the normal release for the selected voice, minus

settings produce a slower release decay, and plus settings

produce a faster release decay.

DETAIL

[F1] Custom Voice Edit

The brilliance and resonance parameters provided here make it possible to vary the tone of the voice over a wide range.

Use the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values.

5 TONE

Dual Voice Edit Functions (Voices 90 through 97)

The following functions are available when editing voices 90 through 97. Different groups of

edit functions are provided for the PSR-5700 normal voices (00 through 89 — page 27) and drum

voices (98 and 99 — page 33).

For all parameters described here the preset value can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and

[+] buttons simultaneously.

DETAIL

+– +–

TONE ……Piano 1

Brilli= 0 Resonanc= 0!

Notes:

The maximum range of both parameters is from -50

through 0 to +50, although this range is more limited with

some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the

parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting

for the selected voice has been reached.

The default values for the selected voice are produced by

settings of “0”. Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons below a

parameter immediately recalls the default value (“0”).

● Brilliance (Brilli)

This parameter alters the cutoff frequency of the filter

applied to the voice, thereby making the sound more or

less brilliant. Minus settings reduce brilliance for a

rounder, more mellow tone, while plus setting increase

brilliance for a sharper tone.

● Resonance (Resonanc)

Plus settings increase the height of a resonant peak at

the filter cutoff frequency, giving the voice greater pres-

ence and sometimes a more “nasal” tone. Minus settings

reduce resonance for a “flatter” sound.

+–

`DUAL NAME

»…:SpacePno

1 DUAL NAME

Character list

[Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥

Notes:

Give your dual voice names that identify both the voices

used, if possible. If you’ve created a new dual voice that

combines piano and organ, for example, you could call it

something like “PianOrg”.

Purpose:

Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the custom

dual voice.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the

desired character location, then use the left [-] and [+] but-

tons to select the desired character. A chart of the available

characters is given below.

+– +–

“DUAL VOICE »…SpacePno

00:Piano 1 19:Voyager

2 DUAL VOICE

Procedure:

Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to select the de-

sired voices.

Notes:

Remember that you can only use voices 00 through 89 in a

custom dual voice. If you increment past voice number 89,

the next voice selected will be 00, and vice versa.

The pitch bend range for DUAL VOICE is limited to ±1

whole tone.

Purpose:

This function allows any two of the PSR-5700’s standard

voices (numbers 00 through 89) to be assigned to the dual

voice.

3 DUAL OCTAVE

Purpose:

Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be inde-

pendently shifted up or down one octave.

Procedure:

Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired

octaves for voices A and B. A setting of “normal” produces

the normal pitch for that voice. “1up” shifts the pitch up one

octave, and “1down” shifts the pitch down one octave.

Notes:

Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the

highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted up or

down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also cause

sudden pitch changes.

Previous OCTAVE settings for the normal voice will be

ignored.

+– +–

£DUAL OCTAVE »…SpacePno

A=1down B=Normal

+– +–

¢DUAL VOLUME »…SpacePno

A=50! B=45

4 DUAL VOLUME

Notes:

The volume range is from “00” (no sound) to “50” (maxi-

mum volume). Use this function to set the optimum balance

between the two voices.

When the parameter is set to “00” or “50” an exclamation

mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the

limit has been reached.

Purpose:

Independently adjusts the volumes of the two voices used

in the dual voice.

Procedure:

Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired

volume levels for voices A and B.

[F1] Custom Voice Edit

+– +–

DUAL PAN »…SpacePno

A=L R B=L R

5 DUAL PAN

Purpose:

Independently sets the pan positions of the two voices

used in the dual voice.

Procedure:

Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired

pan positions for voices A and B. The graphic display indi-

cates the approximate location of the sound between the left

and right speakers.

Notes:

When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan posi-

tion of the selected voice is used. The center pan position can

be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

+– +–

⁄DUAL DETUNE »…SpacePno

A= 0 B=+ 2

6 DUAL DETUNE

Purpose:

Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be detuned

slightly to create a thicker sound.

Procedure:

Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired

detune for voices A and B.

Notes:

The normal tune value is “0”. This can be tuned down to a

maximum setting of -50 or up to a maximum setting of +50.

Each increment equals approximately 0.78 cents (a cent is

one hundredth of a semitone). The maximum amount of

detune that can be set in either direction is therefore 39 cents

— not quite a quarter tone.

This function can be used by leaving one of the voices set

at “0” and detuning the other until the desired effect is

achieved. Another approach is to tune one voice down and

the other up.

The pitch bend range is always ±200 cents, regardless of

the setting of this function.

When the parameter is set to “-50” or “50” an exclamation

mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the

limit has been reached.

+–

`PERC. NAME

»¥:Drum Kit

+– +–

“PERC. PITCH »¥Drum Kit

Prc=Kick1 Pitch= 0

Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voices 98 and 99)

The following functions are available when editing voices 98 and 99. Different groups of edit functions are pro-

vided for the PSR-5700 normal voices (00 through 89 — page 27) and dual voices (90 and 97 — page 30).

1 PERC. NAME

Character list

[Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥

Notes:

Give your drum voice names that identify their character.

If you’ve created a new drum voice intended for rock music,

for example, you could call it something like “RockDrum”.

Purpose:

Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the custom

drum voice.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the

desired character location, then use the left [-] and [+] but-

tons to select the desired character. A chart of the available

characters is given below.

2 PERC. PITCH

Purpose:

Allows the pitch of each instrument in the drum voice to

be individually tuned.

Procedure:

Use left [-] and [+] buttons to select the instrument to be

tuned, and then the right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired

degree of tuning.

Notes:

The maximum tuning range is from -50 through 0 to +50,

with “0” being the normal pitch for the instrument. Each

increment equals approximately 6.25 cents (a cent is one

hundredth of a semitone), for a total tuning range of about

±312 cents.

[F1] Custom Voice Edit

+– +–

¢PERC. TONE »¥Drum Kit

Prc=Kick1 Softnes= 0

+– +–

£PERC. PAN »¥Drum Kit

Prc=Kick1 Pan=L R

[F1] Custom Voice Edit

PERC. PAN

Purpose:

Allows the pan position of each instrument in the drum

voice to be individually adjusted.

Procedure:

Use left [-] and [+] buttons to select the instrument to be

panned, and then the right [-] and [+] buttons to set the de-

sired pan position. The graphic display indicates the approxi-

mate location of the sound between the left and right speak-

ers.

Notes:

Use this function to create the required “stereo image” for

your drum voice. View in the drum kit from the audience

side, for example, the bass drum is normally in the center,

the snare to its right, the tom-toms to the left, and so on.

The center pan position can be instantly selected by press-

ing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

When the parameter is set to “-50” or “50” an exclama-

tion mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating

that the limit has been reached.

4 PERC. TONE

Purpose:

Allows the tone (softness) of each instrument in the drum

voice to be individually adjusted.

Procedure:

Use left [-] and [+] buttons to select the instrument to be

adjusted, and then the right [-] and [+] buttons to set the de-

sired degree of softness.

Notes:

The “softness” setting range is from 0 through -9, with “0”

being the normal setting for the selected instrument. Lower-

ing the softness setting lowers the cutoff frequency of the

filter applied to the selected drum instrument, thereby creat-

ing a softer tone.

Some voices may produce no sound if this parameter is set

too low.

When the parameter is set to “0” or “-9” an exclamation

mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the

limit has been reached.

+– +–

`REVERB TYPE No. 1

Type=Reverb : Hall

+– +–

“REVERB DEPTH

R' B˜ C2' C1' O2¶ O1~

[F2] Reverb, Effect

The PSR-5700 has 23 reverb-based effects and 9 other effects that can be selected via the four

pages accessed by this function. The selected reverb and effect types are applied to the sound

when the [EFFECT] and [REVERB] buttons are used (see page 37 in the Getting Started manual).

1 REVERB TYPE

2 REVERB DEPTH

Notes:

The “TempoSync” effects produce a delay that is synchro-

nized to the currently selected tempo. “Variation : Distort”

produces a distortion effect.

Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do

to your sound.

Purpose:

Selects the reverb effect to be applied when the

[REVERB] button is turned on (see page 37 of the “Getting

Started” manual).

Procedure:

The right [-] and [+] buttons step through the reverb list

effect by effect. For faster selection you can use the left [-]

and [+] buttons to directly select the reverb categories —

Reverb, Delay, etc. — and then use the right [-] and [+] but-

tons to select the desired reverb effect within that category.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to select the parameter for

which reverb depth is to be adjusted (R = rhythm; B = bass;

C1 = chord 1; C2 = chord 2; O1 = orchestra 1; O2 = orches-

tra 2), and use the [-] and [+] buttons to set the reverb depth

for each parameter. Pressing the [-] and [+] buttons simulta-

neously instantly recalls the default depth value.

Notes:

Reverb depth can be adjusted in 7 steps, represented by a

vertical bar to the right of each parameter. The longer the

bar, the greater the reverb depth.

Purpose:

Independently sets the depth of the selected reverb effect

for the rhythm, bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and or-

chestra 2 sound.

The Reverb Effects are:

1. Reverb : Hall

2. Reverb : Room

3. Reverb : Plate

4. Reverb : Church

5. Reverb : Club

6. Reverb : Stage

7. Reverb : Bathroom

8. Reverb : Metal

9. Delay : Short

10. Delay : Medium

11. Delay : Long

12. Delay : OneShot

13. TempoSync : Short

14. TempoSync : Long

15. Echo : Stereo

16. Echo : PingPong

17. Refl&Gate : Panned

18. Refl&Gate : Early

19. Refl&Gate : Gate

20. Delay&Rev : Single

21. Delay&Rev : DelayL/R

22. Variation : Distort.

23. Variation : Tunnel

+– +–

¢EFFECT DEPTH

B˜ C2' C1' O2¶ O1~

[F2] Reverb, Effect

EFFECT TYPE

+– +–

£EFFECT TYPE No. 4

Type=Chorus : 1

4 EFFECT DEPTH

The Effects are:

1. Tremolo :1

2. Tremolo : 2

3. Tremolo : 3

4. Chorus :1

5. Chorus : 2

6. Flange :1

7. Flange : 2

8. Symphony :1

9. Symphony : 2

Notes:

Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do

to your sound.

Purpose:

Selects the effect to be applied when the [EFFECT] button

is turned on (see page 37 of the “Getting Started” manual).

Procedure:

The right [-] and [+] buttons step through the effect list

effect by effect. For faster selection you can use the left [-]

and [+] buttons to directly select the effect categories —

Tremolo, Chorus, etc. — and then use the right [-] and [+]

buttons to select the desired effect within that category.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to select the parameter for

which effect depth is to be adjusted (B = bass; C1 = chord 1;

C2 = chord 2; O1 = orchestra 1; O2 = orchestra 2), and use

the [-] and [+] buttons to set the effect depth for each param-

eter. Pressing the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously instantly

recalls the default depth value.

Notes:

Effect depth can be adjusted in 7 steps, represented by a

vertical bar to the right of each parameter. The longer the

bar, the greater the effect depth.

Purpose:

Independently sets the depth of the selected effect for the

bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 sound.

[F3] Controller & Key Velocity

The [F3] function group includes six functions that affect how the PSR-5700 responds to control

via the keyboard, a footswitch plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SW jack, an expression pedal

plugged into the rear-panel EXP. PEDAL jack, the [SUSTAIN] button and SUSTAIN footswitch, the

PITCH BEND/GLISSANDO wheel, and the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel.

1 KEY VELOCITY

+– +–

`KEY VELOCITY

2 FOOT SWITCH SELECT

+–

“FOOT SWITCH SELECT 1

Type=Glide

Notes:

This function should normally be turned ON so that you

can create expressive dynamics by varying the velocity with

which you play the keys (i.e. how hard you play the keys).

Key velocity can be turned OFF when playing voices that

normally don’t have velocity response (organ, for example),

or to assist young children learning to play the keyboard who

have not yet developed the finger strength and touch for

playing dynamics.

Purpose:

Turns keyboard velocity response on or off.

Procedure:

Use the left or right [-] and [+] keys to turn keyboard ve-

locity response ON or OFF.

Purpose:

Determines the function of a footswitch plugged into the

rear-panel FOOT SW jack.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select one of the follow-

ing footswitch functions:

• Glide ............ Lower orchestra 1 sound by a semitone while

footswitch pressed.

• Harmony ..... Harmony occurs only while footswitch pressed.

• Effect ........... Same as panel [EFFECT] button.

•

Punch In/Out .

Sets punch-in and punch-out points when se-

quencer record mode set to “Punch.”

• Tension ....... Modifies dominant 7th chords in the accompani-

ment to produce a more consistent sound when

playing in a minor key. Also automatically re-

harmonizes non-scale tones on chords other

than the tonic and 7th.

• Perc. 1 ......... Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from

the 98 DRUM KIT voice (see “Notes”).

• Perc. 2 ......... Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from

the 99 POP DRUM KIT voice (see “Notes”).

• Start/Stop............. Same as panel [START] and [STOP]

buttons.

• Start/Re-Start....... Same as panel [START/RE-START] but-

ton.

• Intro1/Fill.............. Same as panel [INTRO.1/FILL IN] button.

• Intro2/Fill.............. Same as panel [INTRO. 2/FILL IN] button.

• Intro3/Ending/rit .. Same as panel [INTRO. 3/ENDING/rit.]

button.

• V.Regist. + ........... Recall next (increment) voice registration.

• P.Regist. + ........... Recall next (increment) panel registration.

• Tap Start .............. Same as PAD Tap Start function.

Notes:

When the “Perc. 1” or “Perc. 2” setting is selected a new

parameter appears to the right of the screen. This allows you

to select the drum or percussion instrument that will be

played when the footswitch is pressed. To select an instru-

ment either use the right [-] and [+] buttons, or press the

corresponding key on the keyboard. The preset velocity

value will be assigned if the [-] and [+] buttons are used,

while the velocity at which the key is played will be assigned

if the keyboard is used to select the drum/percussion instru-

ment.

+–

“FOOT SWITCH SELECT 6

Type=Perc.1 Prc=Kick1

[F3] Controller & Key Velocity

3 EXP. PEDAL SELECT

+– +–

£EXP. PEDAL SELECT ‡

Effect=OFF MastVol=ON

+– +–

†£EXP. PEDAL SELECT ‡

Orc1Vol=OFF Orc2Vol=OFF

Purpose:

Determines which of the PSR-5700’s parts (orchestra,

rhythm, etc.) an expression pedal plugged into the rear-panel

EXP. PEDAL jack will control.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three

display screens. Use the [-] and [+] buttons below each pa-

rameter to turn expression control on or off:

• Effect .........Effect control (Same as MODULATION/EFFECT

wheel. All other parameters automatically OFF).

• MastVol .....Master volume control.

• Orch1Vol ...Orchestra 1 volume control.

• Orch2Vol ...Orchestra 2 volume control.

• ABCVol .....ABC accompaniment volume control.

• RhmVol .....Rhythm volume control.

Notes:

Normally you’ll want to be able to apply expression con-

trol to the orchestra voices without affecting the accompani-

ment and rhythm sound, so “Orch1Vol” should be turned on

while the remaining parameters are turned off.

When “MastVol”, “Orc1Vol”, “Orc2Vol”, “ABCVol” , or “RhmVol”

is turned ON, “Effect” is automatically turned OFF.

When “Orc1Vol”, “Orc2Vol”, “ABCVol” , or “RhmVol” is turned

ON, “MastVol” and “Effect” are automatically turned OFF.

The “Effect” setting only applies when the panel [EFFECT]

button is turned ON.

+– +–

†£EXP. PEDAL SELECT

ABCVol=OFF RhmVol=OFF

DETAIL

4 SUSTAIN PART SELECT

+– +–

¢SUSTAIN PART SELECT

Orch1=ON Orch2=ON

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn sustain on or off for

the orchestra 1 voice, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn

sustain on or off for the orchestra 2 voice.

Notes:

The sustain effect is applied to the specified orchestra

part(s) only when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is turned on

or when the sustain pedal is pressed.

Purpose:

Determines whether the PSR-5700 sustain effect is to be

applied to the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or

both orchestra voices.

5 PITCH BEND SELECT

+– +–

PITCH BEND SELECT

Orch1=ON Orch2=ON

6 WHEEL SELECT

+– +–

†⁄WHEEL SELECT

Orch1=ON Orch2=OFF

+–

⁄WHEEL SELECT ‡

Type=Modulation

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn pitch wheel control

on or off for the orchestra 1 voice, and the right [-] and [+]

buttons to turn pitch wheel on or off for the orchestra 2

voice.

Notes:

If, for example, you’re using the split mode (ORCH.

2v1) with a bass voice on the left and a sax voice on the

right, you’ll want pitch bend to apply only to the right-hand

sax voice. In this case simply turn orchestra 1 pitch bend on

and orchestra 2 pitch bend off.

If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2v1 or-

chestration mode is selected, no pitch bend is applied to the

ORCH. 2 voice.

Purpose:

Determines whether the PITCH BEND/GLISSANDO

wheel will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice,

or both orchestra voices.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select either “Modula-

tion” or “Effect” operation, then press the [>] button to

move to the second display screen and use the left [-] and [+]

buttons to turn wheel control on or off for the orchestra 1

voice, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn wheel control

on or off for the orchestra 2 voice.

Notes:

This function can be used to apply modulation or the se-

lected effect to just one of the voices being played in the split

mode (ORCH. 2v1) to emphasize that voice and provide

greater contrast with the other voice.

When “Effect” operation is selected, the wheel will func-

tion only when the panel [EFFECT] button is turned on.

If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2v1 or-

chestration mode is selected, no modulation is applied to the

ORCH. 2 voice.

Purpose:

Determines whether the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel

will control modulation or the selected effect (page 36), and

whether it will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2

voice, or both orchestra voices.

[F3] Controller & Key Velocity

1 SPLIT POINT

+–

`SPLIT POINT

Split=F›2/G2

Purpose:

Sets the split point for the ORCH.2v1 and AUTO BASS

CHORD accompaniment modes.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to set the split point.

Another way to set the split point is to press the key that is

to be the highest key in the left-hand range — when this is

done the SPLIT POINT function is automatically exited.

Notes:

Press the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously to recall the

default split point setting (F#2/G2).

[F4] Split Point, Interactive Accompaniment, &

+– +–

“INTERACTIVE ACCOMP. ‡

Mode=2 AutoSolo=ON

2 INTERACTIVE ACCOMP.

+– +–

†“INTERACTIVE ACCOMP.

Sense=4 Part=>R

Purpose:

Selects one of two available Interactive Accompaniment

modes, turns the AUTO SOLO function on or off, sets the

sensitivity of the Interactive Accompaniment function, and

determines the keyboard part on which Interactive Accompa-

niment will be based.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two

display screens.

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons in the first screen to select

Interactive Accompaniment mode 1 or 2, and use the right [-]

and [+] buttons to turn the AUTO SOLO function on or off.

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons in the second screen to set

the desired Interactive Accompaniment sensitivity, and use

the right [-] and [+] buttons to select the keyboard part on

which Interactive Accompaniment is to be based.

Notes:

• Mode: When Interactive Accompaniment mode 1 is se-

lected, accompaniment parts that may interfere with what

is played on the keyboard are automatically lowered in

volume when the keyboard is being played. When Interac-

tive Accompaniment mode 2 is selected, the above func-

tion is combined with automatic muting of interfering

parts and automatic switching between VERSE 1 and

VERSE 2 or between CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 in re-

sponse to keyboard activity.

The default Mode setting is “2”.

• AutoSolo: When the AUTO SOLO function is turned ON,

the solo accompaniment variations will automatically be

activated if nothing is played on the keyboard for a few

measures (the actual number of measures depends on the

selected style). Further, the solo variations will automati-

cally be de-activated at the end of the current phrase after

keyboard performance is resumed. No automatic solo

switching occurs when the AUTO SOLO function is

turned off.

The default AutoSolo setting is “on”.

• Sense: The sensitivity range is from “1” to “8.” “8” is the

highest sensitivity. In this case “sensitivity” refers to how

much activity the Interactive Accompaniment system

must detect in the specified section(s) of the keyboard

before a change in the accompaniment occurs.

The default Sense setting is “4”.

• Part: When the “PART” parameter is set to “L+R”, the

Interactive Accompaniment system responds to activity

(i.e. anything you play) on the entire keyboard. When set

the “>R” only activity on the right-hand section of the

keyboard is detected, and when set to “L<” only activity

on the left-hand section of the keyboard is detected.

The default Part setting is “>R”.

3 SUPER STYLE PLAY MODE

+– +–

£SUPER STYLE PLAY MODE

SectionChanging=ON

Purpose:

Determines whether Super Style Play variation switching

will occur at the same time as Accompaniment Verse-to-

Chorus switching.

Procedure:

Use the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to turn Super Style

Play “SectionChanging” on or off.

Notes:

Turning this function on can provide greater contrast be-

tween the chorus and verse variations when using the Ac-

companiment feature.

The default setting is “ON”.

Super Style Play Mode

DETAIL

Although the [F5] DISK function accesses a range of important disk functions, the most com-

monly used disk functions — save to disk and load from disk — can also be directly accessed via

the [TO DISK] and [FROM DISK] buttons, as described below.

Please note that no other PSR-5700 functions will operate while a disk function is in progress.

[F5] Disk

For any disk operation an appropriate floppy disk must first be properly inserted

into the PSR-5700 disk drive. The PSR-5700 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy

disks. Make sure the disk write protect tab is set to the “write enable” position if

you intend to save any data to the disk, and insert the disk with the sliding disk

cover facing the disk drive and the disk label facing upward. Before a new disk

can be used to save data, it must be formatted using the “FORMAT DISK”

function described on page 47.

IMPORTANT

Write Protect OFF

Write Protect tab

The [TO DISK] Button

TO DISK Size:---k

00:N_FILE00 NO YES

TO DISK

FROM DISK

DISK

IN USE

Press this button when you want to save the current contents of the PSR-

5700 memory (see list below) to floppy disk for later re-loading and use.

The display shown to the left will appear:

With the cursor located under the file number parameter at the left of the

lower display line (use the [>] button to move the cursor if necessary), use

the left [-] and [+] buttons to specify a number for the file to be saved (00

— 99). If a file with the selected number already exists on the disk, the

name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number (if no

name has been assigned, “N_FILE” will appear), and the size of the file in

kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. New files

have a “0” size. The cursor can be moved to the various character positions

in the file name (8 characters maximum) and the name edited by selecting

the appropriate characters for each position via the left [-] and [+] buttons.

When the file number has been specified, press the right [+] button under

“YES” on the display to execute the save operation (or press the [-] button

under “NO” on the display to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk”

will appear while the data is being saved, and the amount of remaining data

to be saved will be displayed in arbitrary units on the upper display line.

“Completed!” will appear when the data has been successfully saved.

The data saved to disk is as follows:

• Instrument setup (condition) data.

• Disk style data.

• Custom voice data.

• Custom accompaniment data.

• Voice registration data.

• Panel registration data.

• Super style play data.

• Pad assignment data (Multi, Tempo, and Percussion assignments).

• Sequencer song data.

See page 48 for a list of error messages that may appear during disk save.

If you insert a disk that has not been formatted into the drive, the display

shown to the left will appear when the [TO DISK] button is pressed:

Press the [+] button under “YES” on the display to format the disk (see

“5. FORMAT DISK” on page 47).

The PSR-5700 identifies and handles disk files by number rather than the file

name. If you save to a file number that already contains data, the original data

will be erased and replaced by the new data.

TO DISK Size:---k

01:N_FILE01 NO YES

+– +–

TO DISK Size:---k

01:N_FILE01 NO YES

+– +–

+–

Unformat Disk !

Format Disk? NO YES

IMPORTANT

[F5] Disk

The [FROM DISK] Button

Press this button when you want to re-load a previously saved file from

floppy disk. The data loaded is the same as that saved by the TO DISK

operation described above. When the [FROM DISK] button is pressed the

display shown to the left will appear:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the file to load (00

— 99, file numbers that contain no data will not be displayed). The name of

the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number, and the size of

the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line.

When the file number has been specified, press the right [+] button under

“YES” on the display to execute the load operation (or press the [-] button

under “NO” on the display to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk”

will appear while the data is being loaded, and the amount of remaining

data to be loaded will be displayed in arbitrary units on the upper display

line. “Completed!” will appear when the data has been successfully loaded.

The [FROM DISK] button allows all data in a file to be loaded at once.

To load individual data groups use the FROM DISK function described on

page 45.

See page 48 for a list of error messages that may appear during a disk

load operation.

FROM DISK Size: 35k

01:N_FILE01 NO YES

+– +–

FROM DISK Size: 35k

01:N_FILE01 NO YES

+– +–

FROM DISK Size: 35k

00:N_FILE00 NO YES

TO DISK

FROM DISK

DISK

IN USE

The [F5] DISK Functions

The [F5] DISK function accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of floppy disk data.

If you select the [F5] when no disk is present in the drive, the

“Not Found Disk!” error message will appear on the display.

Not Found Disk !

1 FROM DISK

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the

file to load (00 — 99). The name of the selected file will be

displayed to the right of the number, and the size of the file

in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper dis-

play line. The right [-] and [+] buttons can be used to select

the type of data to be loaded, as shown in “Notes:” below.

When the file and data type have been specified, press the

[>] button to select the next display screen, and press the

right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simul-

taneously to execute the load operation. “Don’t remove disk”

will appear while the data is being loaded. “Completed!” will

appear when the data has been successfully loaded.

Notes:

The following data types can be selected for loading:

• AllData ........ All of the below.

• SetUp .......... Instrument setup (condition) data.

• DiskStyle..... Disk style data.

• Cus.Voice ... Custom voice data.

• Cus.Style .... Custom accompaniment data.

• V.Regist ...... Voice registration data.

• P.Regist ...... Panel registration data.

• SSP.............. Super style play data.

• PadAssign .. Multi, Tempo, and Percussion pad assignment

data.

• Sequencer .. Sequencer song data.

+– +–

`FROM DISK Size: 35k‡

00:N_FILE00 : AllData

• First Screen

• Second Screen

(When SEQUENCER selected)

+– +–

†`FROM DISK Size: 2k‡

Song=1 -> Song=1

(When optional disk “AllData” or

“Disk Style” selected)

+–

†`FROM DISK Size: 29k‡

1-16Slow

• Second/Third Screen

(When optional disk “AllData”, “Disk

Style”, or “Sequencer” selected)

+–

†`FROM DISK

Are you sure? - YES -

Purpose:

Loads the specified file from a floppy disk inserted into

the PSR-5700 disk drive.

[F5] Disk

2 TO DISK

+– +–

“TO DISK Size:---k

00:N_FILE00 - YES -

3 RENAME FILE

When the file number has been specified, press the right

[-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultane-

ously to execute the save operation. “Don’t remove disk”

will appear while the data is being saved. “Completed!” will

appear when the data has been successfully saved.

Notes:

The following data are saved to disk when the save opera-

tion is executed:

• Instrument setup (condition) data.

• Disk style data.

• Custom voice data.

• Custom accompaniment data.

• Voice registration data.

• Panel registration data.

• Super style play data.

• Pad data.

• Sequencer song data.

All data is saved in one operation. Specific data types can

not be saved individually.

See page 48 for a list of error messages that may appear

during disk save.

The PSR-5700 identifies and handles disk files by number

rather than the file name. If you save to a file number that

already contains data, the original data will be erased and

replaced by the new data.

Purpose:

Saves the data listed in “Notes:,” below, to a floppy disk

inserted into the PSR-5700 disk drive.

Procedure:

With the underline cursor located under the file number

parameter at the left of the lower display line (use the [>]

button to move the cursor if necessary), use the left [-] and

[+] buttons to select the number of the file to save (00 —

99). If a file with the selected number already exists on the

disk, the name of the selected file will be displayed to the

right of the number (if no name has been assigned,

“N_FILE” will appear), and the size of the file in kilobytes

(approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. New

files have a “0” size. The cursor can be moved to the various

character positions (8 characters maximum) in the file name

by using the [<] and [>] buttons, and the name can be ed-

ited by selecting the appropriate characters for each position

via the left [-] and [+] buttons.

Purpose:

Allows the name of the file having the specified file

number to be changed as required.

Procedure:

With the underline cursor located under the file number

parameter at the left of the lower display line (use the [>]

button to move the cursor if necessary), use the left [-] and

[+] buttons to select the number of the file (00 — 99). The

current name of the selected file will be displayed to the

right of the number, and the size of the file in kilobytes (ap-

proximate) will be shown on the upper display line. The

cursor can be moved to the various character positions in the

file name and the name edited by selecting the appropriate

characters for each position via the left [-] and [+] buttons.

When the new file name has been entered, press the right

[-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultane-

ously to register the new name. “Completed!” will appear

when the new name has been successfully registered.

Character List

[Space]!#$%&'()0123456789@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^_{}

Notes:

This function lets you change the name of a file without

having to re-load and then re-save the entire file with a new

name.

Since the PSR-5700 uses the file number rather than the

file name to recognize and manage data files, a file saved

with the same number as another file will overwrite that file

even if it has a different name.

+– +–

£RENAME FILE Size: 32k

00:N_FILE00 - YES -

IMPORTANT

4 DELETE FILE

+–

FORMAT DISK

Are you sure? - YES -

5 FORMAT DISK

When the file number has been specified, press the right

[-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultane-

ously to delete the file. “Don’t remove disk” will appear on

the display while the delete operation is in progress, the

“Completed!” will appear when the file has been deleted.

Notes:

Files deleted from disk can not be restored (there is no

“Undo” function), so be sure you’ve selected the right file

number before actually executing the delete operation.

Purpose:

Deletes the specified file from the disk.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the

file to be deleted (00 — 99). The name of the selected file

will be displayed to the right of the number, and the size of

the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the up-

per display line.

Purpose:

Formats a floppy disk for use with the PSR-5700.

Procedure:

After inserting a new floppy disk into the disk drive, press

the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display

simultaneously to begin formatting. “Don’t remove disk”

will appear while the disk is being formatted, and the number

of remaining tracks to be formatted will be shown on the

upper display line. “Completed!” will appear when the disk

has been successfully formatted.

Notes:

The PSR-5700 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks.

Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk,

so be sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain

important data!

6 DISK FREE AREA

⁄DISK FREE AREA

90% (640k)

Purpose:

Displays the remaining data capacity of the loaded disk in

percent and kilobytes.

Notes:

This is a display-only function with no editable param-

eters.

+– +–

¢DELETE FILE Size: 32k

00:N_FILE00 - YES -

[F5] Disk

● Disk Error Messages

If an error is encountered when a disk operation is executed, one of the following error messages may appear:

“ Type Error or Unformat! ”

The disk in the drive has not been formatted or the disk is

the wrong type or has the wrong format.

“ Not Found File! ”

The disk does not contain any files saved by the user.

“ Write Protect on ! ”

The disk write protect tab is in the write disable position.

“ Disk Error! ”

A data error has occurred during a save, delete, or format

operation.

“ Disk Full! ”

The floppy disk does not have enough remaining capacity

to carry out the specified operation.

“ Sample Data Disk! ”

You have attempted to perform a save, rename, delete,

format, or disk free area operation while the supplied data

disk is in the drive.

“ Style Disk! ”

You have attempted to perform a save, rename, delete,

format, or disk free area operation while a style disk or other

optional pre-recorded disk is in the drive.

“ Not Found Disk! ”

No disk in drive.

“ Bad File Name! ”

The file name is all spaces and cannot be recognized by

the PSR-5700.

“ Not Enough Memory! ”

Not enough memory to load the specified sequencer file

from disk.

Some of the error displays automatically revert to the pre-

vious display after a few seconds, while others require that

the [EXIT] button be pressed to exit from the error display.

If a damaged disk is used the data countdown during

FROM DISK or TO DISK operations may stop and the load

or save operation may get “hung up.” In this case, eject the

disk from the drive even though the DISK IN USE lamp may

be on. Discard the damaged disk.

+–

`MEMORY BACK UP

OFF

[F6] Utility & MIDI

The [F6] function accesses to utility functions and a versatile range of MIDI functions.

MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that

allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control

one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer

far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. The PSR-5700 offers a

range of MIDI functions that allow it to be used in even sophisticated MIDI systems.

• Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15

meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors.

1 MEMORY BACKUP

Notes:

The data backed up (retained in memory even when the

power is turned off) by the PSR-5700 are listed below. When

memory backup is turned OFF, the initial factory settings are

automatically recalled whenever the power is turned on.

Purpose:

Turns memory backup on or off.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn memory backup on

or off.

* The above data will be retained in memory for about one week even if the power is not turned on. To retain the

backed up data for longer periods, turn the power switch ON for a few minutes at least once a week.

* The default setting for this parameter is “OFF”.

Data Backed Up When MEMORY BACKUP is ON

• Sequencer Song Data

• Custom Accompaniment Data

• Custom Voice Data

• Disk Style Data

• Panel Registration Memory Data

• Voice Registration Memory Data

• Multi Pad Data

• Tempo Change Data

• Percussion Pad Data

• Super Style Play Data

• Voice Part Select

• Orchestration

• Orchestra 1 Voice

• Orchestra 2 Voice

• Orchestra 1 Octave

• Orchestra 2 Octave

• Harmony On/Off

• Harmony Type

• Style

• ABC On/Off

• ABC Mode

• Manual Bass Voice

• Transpose Data

• Tune

• IA On/Off

• Accompaniment Variation

• Multi Pad Select

• Pad Synchro, Break, Repeat, On/Off

• Left Hold On/Off

• Key Velocity On/Off

• Foot Switch Assign Data

• Foot Switch Percussion

• Expression Pedal Assign Data

• Sustain On/Off

• Sustain Part Select

• Pitch Bend Select

• Wheel On/Off

• Wheel Type

• Split Point

• IA Mode

• Auto Solo On/Off

• IA Sensitivity

• IA Part

• Super Style Play Mode

• Reverb On/Off

• Reverb Type & Depth

• Effect On/Off

• Effect Type & Depth

• Memory Backup On/Off

• MIDI Transmit Ch

• MIDI Receive Ch

• MIDI Split Send Ch

• MIDI Rhythm Receive Ch

• MIDI Sequencer Ch

• MIDI Multi Part Ch

• MIDI Multi Part Volume

• MIDI Multi Part Voice

• MIDI Switch (Control Change, Pitch Bend, Program

Change, System Exclusive)

• MIDI Clock

• MIDI Local On/Off

• MIDI Transpose Add Note

• MIDI Split Send On/Off, Enable

Data Backed Up When MEMORY BACKUP is OFF

• Sequencer Song Data

• Custom Accompaniment Data

• Custom Voice Data

• Disk Style Data

• Panel Registration Memory Data

• Voice Registration Memory Data

• Multi Pad Data

• Tempo Change Data

• Percussion Pad Data

• Super Style Play Data

+– +–

“RECALL INITIAL DATA 1

Data=Alldata -Execute-

[F6] Utility & MIDI

2 RECALL INITIAL DATA

Notes:

Here’s a list of the data types that can be initialized by this

function:

LCD Data Type

AllData ........ All data.

Pad .............. Pad data.

V.Regist ...... Voice registration data.

P.Regist ...... Panel registration data.

SSP ............. Super style play data.

ABC&IA....... Auto Bass Chord & Interactive Accompani-

ment data.

HarmoType. Harmony type data.

CusVoice .... Custom voice data.

Effect........... Effect type, depth.

Reverb ........ Reverb type, depth.

Control........ All controller settings (F3 function group).

Split............. Split point.

Midi ............. All MIDI data.

Purpose:

Recalls the specified initial factory settings.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the type of factory

preset data you want to recall (see “Notes” below), then

press both the right [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

“Busy!” will appear while the initialization is taking place,

and “Completed” will appear when the initialization is com-

plete.

The [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] Button

The PSR-5700 is compatible with both Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection and General MIDI (GM) software. To use such

software, press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button in order to switch the PSR-5700 tone generator system to

the DOC/GM mode. When the DOC/GM mode is selected you can select and play the voices via the PSR-5700 itself, or con-

trol the voices from an external MIDI sequencer or music computer. Data transmitted from the PSR-5700 can also be used to

control an external GM-mode tone generator.

The PSR-5700 normal play mode is known as the REMOTE CONTROL mode.

● PLAYING DOC OR GENERAL MIDI SOFTWARE ON THE PSR-5700

The PSR-5700 can play optional Yamaha Disc Orchestra Collection software, and General MIDI mode software recorded

by other equipment. When a disk of either type (3.5" 2DD disks only) is inserted into the PSR-5700 disk drive, the PSR-5700

automatically switches the internal tone generator system to allow playback of the software and performance on the keyboard

(Getting Started, page 40).

DOC

[F6] Utility & MIDI

● GENERAL MIDI DATA RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Tone generator, etc.

Music computer,

sequencer, etc.

❍ ABOUT GENERAL MIDI

The existing MIDI protocol allows performance and other data to be transferred between different instruments, even if

they are from different manufacturers. This means, for example, that sequence data that was originally created to control a

tone generator from manufacturer A can also be used to control a different tone generator from manufacturer B. Since the

voice allocation in different devices from different manufacturers is usually different, however, appropriate program

change data must be transmitted to select the right voices.

The General MIDI protocol was developed to minimize confusion and the need for re-programming when playing soft-

ware created by one MIDI device on another. This has been achieved by defining a standard voice allocation in which the

same or similar voices are accessed by the same program change numbers or MIDI channels. The current standard recog-

nized by the International MIDI Association is known as “GM System Level 1.” The PSR-5700 voice allocation complies

with the GM System Level 1 standard when it is switched to the DOC/GM mode. See the “GENERAL MIDI (GM) Voice

List” on page 254 for details.

• General MIDI data can be received

via the MIDI IN connector and

played by the PSR-5700.

• General MIDI data transmitted via the

PSR-5700 MIDI OUT connector can be

used to control appropriate tone gen-

erators and other MIDI equipment.

[F6] Utility & MIDI

■ THE REMOTE CONTROL MODE

The PSR-5700’s normal mode of operation (i.e. when the DOC/GM mode is not selected) is known as the REMOTE CON-

TROL mode. In this mode key on/off, voice, sustain, volume, pitch bend, and other performance data is transmitted and re-

ceived without modification directly via the MIDI OUT and MIDI IN connectors. The receive channel is determined by the

MIDI channel setting parameter described on page 54. It is also possible to play the rhythm instrument voices via the rhythm

channel (page 54). More complex control is available through the Multi Part Setting parameters (page 56), allowing up to 8

different voices to be controlled via different MIDI channels. It is possible, for example, to play a number of melody parts

from an external MIDI control device to the accompaniment of the PSR-5700 ABC system.

■ THE DOC MODE

In this mode the PSR-5700 can play Yamaha Disk Orchestra (DOC) software. MIDI data is also transmitted and received

in accordance with Yamaha DOC specifications.

For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 242, the “DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List” on page

253, and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 256.

● 3 Ways To Select the DOC Mode

• Insert a DOC disk (the DOC mode is automatically se-

lected).

• Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button.

• Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To DOC Mode” message

from an external MIDI device.

● Controls That Function In the DOC Mode

• Keyboard.

• Volume controls (Getting Started, page 41).

• VOICE SELECT button.*

• [+] and [-] buttons.

• [s] and [t] page buttons (Move to the voice select

screen).

• [<] and [>] shift buttons (Move to the transpose, tune, and

octave change screens. Octave change only applies to

Orchestra 1).

• START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function).

• REVERB and EFFECT buttons.

• TEMPO button (The recommended tempo can be selected

by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously).

• SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on the

keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra 1).

• PITCH BEND (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Pitch

Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed at ±300

cents).

• WHEEL (Modulation applies to Orchestra 1).

• KEY VELOCITY (Applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Fixed at KEY VELOCITY = ON).

• PAD (Fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per RE-

MOTE CONTROL mode, and cannot be changed in the

DOC mode).

• FOOT SW (Applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE).

• EXP. PEDAL (Applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Exp. Pedal Select fixed at Orc1Vol).

• FUNCTION buttons (Only MIDI settings — F2 and F6 —

can be changed).

• MIDI transmission/reception.

* Both the BANK and NUMBER VOICE SELECT buttons can be

used, but some numbers do not have assigned voices and cannot

be selected (refer to the “DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice

List” on page 253). These voice numbers are skipped when the [-]

and [+] buttons are used.

Since octave offset is applied to some voices played via the

keyboard in the DOC mode, the pitch of notes played via the

keyboard may not match that of those played by the corre-

sponding MIDI note numbers.

If you select a function that is not available in the DOC mode,

“Not Available in DOC!” will appear on the display.

● 3 Ways to Exit From the DOC Mode

• Remove the DOC disk.

• Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] or [EXIT]

button.

• Receive any MIDI exclusive message that selects a differ-

ent mode from an external MIDI device.

+– +–

DISK ORCHESTRA PLAY

Song=ALL Mode=L+R

DETAIL

[F6] Utility & MIDI

■ THE GENERAL MIDI (GM) MODE

In this mode MIDI data is received and transmitted in accordance with the General MIDI Level 1 standard.

For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 242, the “GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List” on page 254, and

the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 256.

● Controls That Function In the GENERAL

MIDI Mode

• Keyboard.

• ORCH1 volume control (controls the volume of the notes

played on the keyboard).

• VOICE SELECT button (01 through 99 only. Use the [-]

and [+] buttons for other voice numbers. Refer to the

“GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List” on page 254).

• [+] and [-] buttons.

• [s] and [t] page buttons (Move to the volume control

screen for all channels*).

• [<] and [>] shift buttons (Move to the transpose, tune, and

octave change screens. Octave change only applies to

Orchestra 1. Tune not available).

• START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function).

• REVERB and EFFECT buttons (REVERB is automatically

turned on when the GM mode is selected).

• TEMPO button (The recommended tempo can be selected

by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously).

• SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on the

keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra 1).

• PITCH BEND (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Pitch

Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed at ±200

cents).

• WHEEL (Modulation applies to notes played on the key-

board).

• KEY VELOCITY (Applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Fixed at KEY VELOCITY = ON).

• PAD (Fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per RE-

MOTE CONTROL mode, and cannot be changed in the

GM mode).

• FOOT SW (Applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE).

• EXP. PEDAL (Applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Exp. Pedal Select fixed at Orc1Vol).

• FUNCTION buttons (Only MIDI settings — F2 and F6 —

can be changed).

• MIDI transmission/reception.

Coarse tuning and fine tuning can be controlled by MIDI data

reception only.

Rhythm data can be received on channel 10 only.

See the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 256 for

details on which rhythm voices are played by which note num-

bers.

If you select a function that is not available in the GM mode,

“Not Available in GM!” will appear on the display.

● 3 Ways To Select the GENERAL MIDI Mode

• Insert a General MIDI disk (the GM mode is automatically

selected).

• Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button.

• Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To GM Mode” message

from an external MIDI device.

When the General MIDI mode is selected, the parameters

listed below are initialized as shown. As for the panel setup

data, only the MIDI channel and the volume and expression

settings for the rhythm channel are initialized.

General MIDI Level 1 Mode Initial Settings

Program Change# ........ 1 (Piano 1)

Pitch Bend .................... ±0 (Center)

Volume ......................... 100

Pan ...............................

Voice Preset

Modulation .................... 0 (Off)

Expression .................... 127 (Max.)

Hold (Sustain)............... 0 (Off)

Pitch Bend Sense ......... 02H/00H

(2 semitones)

Fine Tune ..................... 40H/00H ±0

Coarse Tune................. 40H/00H ±0

RPN .............................. NULL

Only GM data recorded on 3.5" 2DD IBM-format disks in

standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 can be played on the PSR-

5700 (up to track 17 with format 1). Also note that data that

does not comply with GM Level 1 specifications may not be

reproduced.

* “IBM” is a registered trademark of International Business Machines.

+– +–

GENERAL MIDI

Song=001 001:Piano1

DETAIL

[F6] Utility & MIDI

* The [s] and [t] page buttons can be used to access the

volume control screen for all channels.

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to move the cursor to the

channel for which the volume is to be adjusted, then use the

right [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume. The longer the

graphic bar on the display, the higher the volume.

The numbers across the top of the display above the bar

graphs correspond to the MIDI channels. From left to right

the channels are 1 through 9, “R” is channel 10 (the rhythm

channel), and numbers 1 through 6 to the right of “R” corre-

spond to channels 11 through 16.

● 3 Ways to Exit From the GENERAL MIDI

Mode

• Remove the General MIDI disk.

• Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] or [EXIT]

button.

• Receive any MIDI exclusive message that selects a differ-

ent mode from an external MIDI device.

+– +–

GM 123456789R123456

†‡~¶˘~§¶~~˘ ~ ˘~

3 MIDI CHANNEL SETTING

The contents of this page are different depending on whether the Remote

Control mode or the DOC/GM mode is selected.

Purpose:

Sets the basic transmit, basic receive, split transmit,

rhythm receive, and individual sequencer track transmit

channels.

Procedure:

In the first display screen the left [-] and [+] buttons select

the basic transmit channel (1 … 16) and the right [-] and [+]

buttons select the basic receive channel (1 … 16, All).

In the second display screen the left [-] and [+] buttons

select the split (left-hand) transmit channel (1 … 16) and the

right [-] and [+] buttons select the rhythm receive channel (1

… 16).

In the third display screen the left [-] and [+] buttons se-

lect a sequencer track number (1 … 7) and the right [-] and

[+] buttons select the transmit channel (1 … 16) for that

track.

Notes:

The various channel settings are as follows:

• Transmit

This setting is the same in the Remote Control and

DOC/GM modes. It determines the basic channel on

which all PSR-5700 data will be transmitted.

• Receive

The receive channel setting is the same in the Remote

Control and DOC/GM modes, except that in the DOC/GM

mode only MIDI system exclusive messages will be re-

ceived. The receive channel is the basic channel on which

the PSR-5700 will receive all MIDI data. If set to “All,”

data can be received via all 16 MIDI channels.

• SplitTrn

The split transmit channel functions only in the Remote

Control mode. This is the channel on which left-hand

performance data (i.e. data produced by playing keys to

the left of the split point) will be transmitted. Right-hand

performance data is transmitted on the basic transmit

channel specified in the first display screen.

• RhmRcv

This setting is the same in the Remote Control and

DOC/GM modes. It specifies an independent MIDI chan-

nel via which the PSR-5700’s rhythm (drums and percus-

sion) can be controlled. This means you can, for example,

play the selected voice via the basic receive channel while

simultaneously playing the rhythm instruments via a dif-

ferent channel (i.e. the RhmRcv channel).

● Remote Control Mode

+– +–

£MIDI CHANNEL SETTING ‡

Transmit= 1 Receive= 1

+– +–

†£MIDI CHANNEL SETTING ‡

SplitTrn= 2 RhmRcv=16

+– +–

†£MIDI CHANNEL SETTING

Seq.Track=1 Trans.Ch= 3

[F6] Utility & MIDI

• Seq.Track/Trans.Ch

This setting only applies when the Remote Control

Mode is selected. Separate transmit channels can be set

for sequencer tracks 1 through 7 (the ACCOMP. track

does not transmit) so the PSR-5700 sequencer can be used

to drive an external multi-timbre tone generator or multi-

ple tone generators via the specified channels.

If basic, split, and or sequencer track transmit channels are set

to the same MIDI channel number, an exclamation mark (!) will

appear next to the channel number. If the basic and split trans-

mit channels are set to the same number, the data from both

the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard will be trans-

mitted on the basic transmit channel (the content of the data to

be transmitted can be set via the “SPLIT SEND PART” func-

tion described on page 57). Further, if several sequencer

tracks are set to transmit on the same channel, the data from

all those tracks will be transmitted on the same channel.

As with the transmit channels described above, if the basic,

rhythm, and or multi part (page 56) transmit channels are set

to the same MIDI channel number, an exclamation mark (!) will

appear next to the channel number. In this case the received

data will apply to all voices accessed by that channel number.

If, for example, the basic, rhythm, and multi part receive chan-

nel are all set to the same number, any note data received on

that channel will play the orchestra 1, rhythm, and multi part

voices simultaneously.

If the basic receive channel is set to “All,” a multi part receive

channel cannot be assigned.

Notes:

The “Local” parameter determines whether the PSR-5700

is controlled by its own keyboard or MIDI data received

from an external MIDI device. When local control is on, the

PSR-5700 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, al-

lowing the internal voices to be played directly from the

keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that

the PSR-5700 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but

the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the

MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the key-

board. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds

to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector.

This means that while an external sequencer or MIDI compu-

ter, for example, plays the PSR-5700’s internal voices, an

external tone generator can be played from the PSR-5700

keyboard.

When Local is “ON” voice and controller parameters that

can be played via the keyboard are set to the same channel as

the transmit channel.

• TransposeAddNote

When this parameter is turned “OFF,” the PSR-5700

transpose settings are not applied to transmitted MIDI

data. When turned “ON,” the PSR-5700 transpose settings

apply to transmitted MIDI data in the same they do to

notes played on the PSR-5700 itself. As for received

MIDI data, when this parameter is “ON” the note data is

not transposed, and when set to “OFF” the note data is

transposed.

Use the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn this parameter

ON or OFF.

In addition to accepting MIDI note data on 16 channels (also

during disk playback), the PSR-5700 has a separate keyboard

note channel. Data on this channel can only be controlled via

the PSR-5700 panel controls (when “Local” is “ON”), and is not

affected by MIDI data. This data is transmitted via MIDI OUT,

on the “KeyboardCh”.

● DOC/GM Mode

DETAIL

Purpose:

Sets the transmit channel and turns local control on or off

for the DOC/GM mode.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons set the transmit channel (1

… 16) and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn local control

on or off. The “TransposeAddNote” parameter is available in

the second screen.

+– +–

£DOC/GM SETTING ‡

KeyboardCh= 1 Local=ON

+–

†£DOC/GM SETTING

TransposeAddNote=ON

+– +–

¢MULTI PART SETTING ‡

Part=1 Channel= 3

[F6] Utility & MIDI

+– +–

†¢MULTI PART:1

Volume=99 00:Piano 1

4 MULTI PART SETTING (Remote Control Mode Only)

Purpose:

Allows the receive channel, volume, and voice to be inde-

pendently specified for 8 separate “parts” to be controlled

from an external MIDI device.

In the DOC mode MIDI reception occurs via channels 1

through 10, and channel 15 (rhythm part). In the GM mode,

reception occurs on all channels regardless of these settings.

Procedure:

In the first display screen use the left [-] and [+] buttons to

select a part number (1 … 8) and the right [-] and [+] buttons

select the receive channel (1 … 16, Off) for that part.

In the second display screen the right [-] and [+] buttons

select the voice for the currently selected part number in the

second display screen, while the left [-] and [+] buttons set

the volume of the voice.

Notes:

Note that parts that are not required can be turned “OFF”

via the “Channel” parameter in the first display screen.

If the channel number of any part is set to the same chan-

nel number as a lower-numbered part, the “!OFF” display

will appear and that part will be turned off.

Any of the preset or custom voices can be specified via the

voice parameter in the second display screen.

If the basic receive channel is set to “All,” reception is disabled

on all multi part channels, and “!OFF” appears in place of the

multi part channel numbers.

DETAIL

+– +–

MIDI SWITCH ‡

CtrlChg=ON ProgChg=ON

+– +–

† MIDI SWITCH

PitBnd=ON Exclusive=ON

5 MIDI SWITCH (Remote Control Mode Only)

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between display

screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to

turn reception/transmission of the corresponding MIDI data

on or off.

Notes:

These “switches” can be used to determine how the PSR-

5700 responds to MIDI data received from external equip-

ment. If, for example, you don’t want the PSR-5700 voices

to be changed by program change messages received from an

external device, turn the program change switch “OFF.”

The same applies to transmission from the PSR-5700 —

turn off data that you don’t want to be transmitted to external

equipment.

In the DOC/GM mode, all control change data are trans-

mitted and received regardless of the settings on this page.

Purpose:

Allows reception and transmission of control change, pro-

gram change, pitch bend, and system exclusive data to be

independently turned on or off.

+– +–

†⁄MIDI SYSTEM

SplitSnd=ON Out=L&R

+–

†⁄MIDI SYSTEM ‡

TransposeAddNote=ON

+– +–

⁄MIDI SYSTEM ‡

Clock=INT Local=ON

6 MIDI SYSTEM (Remote Control Mode Only)

• Local

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the

PSR-5700 keyboard controls its internal tone generator,

allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the

keyboard. This situation is “Local Control ON” since the

internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own

keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so

that the PSR-5700 keyboard does not play the internal

voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still trans-

mitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are

played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal

tone generator responds to MIDI information received via

the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external

sequencer or MIDI computer, for example, plays the PSR-

5700’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be

played from the PSR-5700 keyboard.

Local control cannot be turned ON or OFF during sequencer

recording.

• TransposeAddNote

When this parameter is turned “OFF”, the transmitted

MIDI note data will not be affected by the PSR-5700

transpose setting. When “ON,” the transmitted notes will

be transposed in accordance with the PSR-5700 transpose

setting. The reverse is true for reception: when “ON” re-

ceived note data is not transposed; when “OFF” received

note data is transposed.

• SplitSnd/Out

When the SplitSnd (split send) parameter is turned

“ON,” the setting of the “Out” parameter determines

whether MIDI note data from the left-hand (“Left”), right-

hand (“Right”), or both sections of the keyboard (“L&R”)

are transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. You could

choose to transmit only the right-hand data so that only

notes played on the right-hand section of the keyboard are

reproduced via an external tone generator, for example.

When turned “OFF” data from the entire keyboard is

transmitted on the basic transmit channel.

Purpose:

These three display screens provide access to a number of

important MIDI system “switches” — internal or external

clock synchronization, local control on/off, transpose data

transmission on/off, and split mode data transmission on/off.

Procedure:

Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between display

screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to

select the desired state for each parameter.

Notes:

The various system parameters operate as follows:

• Clock

The “INT” (internal) clock setting is the normal setting

when the PSR-5700 is being used alone. If you are using

the PSR-5700 with an external sequencer, MIDI compu-

ter, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-5700 to

be synchronized to the external device, set this function to

“EXT” (external). In the latter case, the external device

must be connected to the PSR-5700 MIDI IN connector,

and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock sig-

nal.

DETAIL

[F6] Utility & MIDI

BULK DUMP DATA RECEIVE

PRegist 0%~~~~~~~ 100%

+– +–

¥MEMORY DATA TRANSMIT

Data=Panel -Execute-

¥DATA TRANSMIT

PRegist 0%~~~~~~~ 100%

●MIDI Bulk Dump Reception

(Memory Data Receive)

The PSR-5700 can receive bulk data transmitted by a sec-

ond PSR-5700 as long as it is not accessing disk data, the

Custom Accompaniment Programmer is not engaged, and the

DOC/General MIDI Level 1 mode is not selected. When a

bulk dump is received the following display will appear:

The bar graph roughly indicates the progress of the bulk

dump receive operation. “Completed!” will appear on the

display when the data has been successfully received.

●Receiving MIDI Bulk Dump Request

Messages

When the REMOTE CONTROL mode is selected and the

PSR-5700 receives a MIDI bulk dump request message from

an external device, The display shown above appears and a

bulk data transmission is performed. Progress of the trans-

mission is shown in bar-graph form on the display.

●Bulk Dump Error Messages

If an error is encountered during bulk reception, a

“CHECK SUM DATA ERROR !”, “END OF EXCLUS ER-

ROR !”, or “HEADER DATA ERROR!” error message will

appear for a few seconds and the receive operation will be

terminated. In the case of a “CHECK SUM DATA ERROR

!” or “END OF EXCLUS ERROR !”, the data will be re-

placed up until the point at which the error occurred. Data

being received at the time the error occurred will be initial-

ized. All other data is not affected. In the case of a

“HEADER DATA ERROR!”, all data will be left unaltered.

Broken cables and other causes of data errors cause a “BULK

ERROR!” message.

7 DATA TRANSMIT (Remote Control Mode Only)

Purpose:

Transmits the specified PSR-5700 panel or memory data

via the MIDI OUT connector.

Procedure:

Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select “Panel” or

“Memory” data (see “Notes” below), then press both the

right [-] and [+] buttons under “-Execute-” on the display

simultaneously to begin data transmission. A bar graph

shows the progress of the transmit operation, and “Com-

pleted!” will appear on the screen when the transmission is

finished.

Notes:

When “Panel” is selected all PSR-5700 panel settings are

transmitted.

When “Memory” is selected the following data types are

transmitted:

LCD Data Type

SetUp ........ Panel data.

VRegist ..... Voice registration data.

PRegist ..... Panel registration data.

SSP ........... Super style play data.

PadData .... Multi, tempo, and percussion pad data.

CusVoic .... Custom voice data.

CusStyl ..... Custom style data.

Sequenc.... Sequencer data.

The selected data is transmitted as a MIDI bulk dump that

can be automatically received by a second PSR-5700 or other

compatible MIDI device.

DETAIL

BULK DUMP DATA SEND

PRegist 0%~~~~~~~ 100%

Index

This index covers both the PSR-5700 “Getting Started” and “Advanced Features” manuals, so the

page numbers include coded prefixes to indicate in which manual the information can be found:

GS = Getting Started

AF = Advanced Features

Delete all tracks .......................................................... AF-11

Delete file ................................................................... AF-47

Demo ..........................................................................GS-10

Disk ............................................................................ AF-42

Disk error messages .................................................. AF-48

Disk free area ............................................................. AF-47

Disk functions ............................................................. AF-45

Disk orchestra mode voice list.................................. AF-253

Disk orchestra/general MIDI button ............................ AF-50

Disk style ....................................................................GS-25

DOC disk playback .....................................................GS-40

DOC mode ................................................................. AF-52

DOC/GM mode ........................................................... AF-50

Drum kits ....................................................................GS-14

Drum voice edit .......................................................... AF-33

Dual detune ................................................................ AF-32

Dual mode ..................................................................GS-12

Dual name .................................................................. AF-30

Dual octave ................................................................ AF-31

Dual pan ..................................................................... AF-32

Dual voice ................................................................... AF-31

Dual voice edit ............................................................ AF-30

Dual volume ............................................................... AF-31

Editing procedure ....................................................... AF-26

Effect depth ................................................................ AF-36

Effect type .................................................................. AF-36

Effect wheel ................................................................GS-37

EG rate ....................................................................... AF-29

Electrical interference ................................................... GS-5

Erase .......................................................................... AF-12

Event abbreviations .................................................... AF-13

Exit button .................................................................. AF-26

Exp. pedal select ........................................................ AF-38

Expression & effects...................................................GS-36

Expression pedal jack ..................................................GS-9

A tempo ......................................................................GS-35

ABC ............................................................................GS-18

Accelerando ...............................................................GS-34

Accents ....................................................................... AF-16

Accompaniment ..........................................................GS-18

Accompaniment name.......................................... AF-18, 20

Accompaniment style ................................................. AF-15

Accompaniment variation ........................................... AF-15

Attack ......................................................................... AF-29

Auto solo ....................................................................GS-24

Bank buttons ........................................................GS-13, 20

Bass & chord parts ..................................................... AF-16

Beat display ................................................................ GS-21

Brilliance ..................................................................... AF-30

Change pattern ........................................................... AF-23

Chord pads ................................................................. GS-30

Chorus ........................................................................ GS-22

Cleaning .......................................................................GS-4

Clock .......................................................................... AF-57

Common ..................................................................... AF-28

Condition/rec type ........................................................ AF-7

Controller .................................................................... AF-37

Copy ........................................................................... AF-22

Custom accompaniment edit ...................................... AF-19

Custom accompaniment programmer ........................ AF-15

Custom number .......................................................... AF-18

Custom voice edit ....................................................... AF-27

Custom voice name .................................................... AF-27

Data backup .................................................................GS-5

Data transmit .............................................................. AF-58

Decay ......................................................................... AF-29

Index

Fader select ................................................................ AF-20

Faster .........................................................................GS-35

Fill-ins .........................................................................GS-23

Fingered chords .........................................................GS-18

Fingering chart .........................................................GS-178

Floppy disks ...........................................................GS-5, 25

Foot switch select ....................................................... AF-37

Footswitch jack .............................................................GS-8

Format disk ................................................................. AF-47

From disk .................................................................... AF-45

From disk button ......................................................... AF-44

General function selection .......................................... AF-26

General MIDI .............................................................. AF-51

General MIDI mode .................................................... AF-53

General MIDI mode voice list ................................... AF-254

Glissando ...................................................................GS-37

GM/DOC mode percussion map .............................. AF-256

Handling & transport .....................................................GS-4

Harmony ........................................................... GS-36, AF-7

Headphones .................................................................GS-8

Hertz ...........................................................................GS-15

Icons .............................................................................GS-3

Initialization ................................................................. GS-11

Input jacks ....................................................................GS-8

Insert all tracks ........................................................... AF-12

Interactive accompaniment ............................ GS-24, AF-40

Intro, fill-in, ending patterns ........................................ AF-24

Introduction................................................................. GS-21

Key velocity ................................................................ AF-37

Keyboard percussion ..................................................GS-14

Left hold ...................................................................... GS-36

Left-hand keyboard section ........................................GS-22

Location ........................................................................ GS-4

Manual bass ...............................................................GS-19

Manuals, about the ....................................................... GS-3

Measure/beat ............................................................. AF-19

Memory backup .......................................................... AF-49

Metronome ................................................................... AF-7

MIDI ............................................................................ AF-49

MIDI bulk dump .......................................................... AF-58

MIDI channel setting................................................... AF-54

MIDI connectors ...........................................................GS-9

MIDI function tree ..................................................... AF-242

MIDI switch ................................................................. AF-56

MIDI system ............................................................... AF-57

Modulation .................................................................. GS-37

Modulation depth ........................................................ AF-28

Modulation speed ....................................................... AF-28

Multi pad mode ........................................................... GS-28

Multi pad repeat playback ..........................................GS-31

Multi part setting ......................................................... AF-56

Music stand ..................................................................GS-9

Note shift .................................................................... AF-14

Number buttons .................................................... GS-13, 20

Octave ........................................................................ AF-28

Octave change ...........................................................GS-16

Orchestra 1 and 2....................................................... GS-13

Orchestration .............................................................. GS-12

Output jacks .................................................................GS-8

Overdub recording........................................................ AF-8

Pads ...........................................................................GS-28

Pan ............................................................................. AF-28

Panel registration .......................................................GS-38

Perc break function ....................................................GS-33

Perc pad mode ...........................................................GS-32

Perc. name ................................................................. AF-33

Perc. pan .................................................................... AF-34

Perc. pitch .................................................................. AF-33

Perc. tone ................................................................... AF-34

Index

Percussion instrument cancel .................................... AF-16

Percussion map ........................................................ AF-255

Phrase pads ...............................................................GS-28

Pitch bend ..................................................................GS-37

Pitch bend range ........................................................ AF-28

Pitch bend select ........................................................ AF-39

Power supply ................................................................ GS-4

Punch recording ........................................................... AF-8

Quantize ............................................................... AF-10, 21

Recall initial data ........................................................ AF-50

Record track selection .................................................. AF-4

Recordable parameters (sequencer) ............................ AF-4

Recording type ............................................................. AF-8

Release ...................................................................... AF-29

Remote control mode ................................................. AF-52

Remove event ...................................................... AF-13, 23

Rename file ................................................................ AF-46

Replace recording ........................................................ AF-8

Resonance ................................................................. AF-30

Reverb ........................................................................ GS-37

Reverb depth .............................................................. AF-35

Reverb type ................................................................ AF-35

Rhythm accompaniment .............................................GS-23

Rhythm part ................................................................ AF-15

Ritardando ............................................................ GS-23, 35

Save to accomp. ......................................................... AF-20

Sequence editing.......................................................... AF-7

Sequencer playback ..................................................... AF-6

Sequencer record ......................................................... AF-3

Single-finger chords ...................................................GS-19

Slower ........................................................................GS-35

Solo ............................................................................GS-22

Song clear .................................................................. AF-14

Song number ................................................................ AF-3

Split mode ..................................................................GS-12

Split point.................................................................... AF-40

Style list ......................................................................GS-20

Super style play ..........................................................GS-26

Super style play mode ................................................ AF-41

Sustain ........................................................... AF-29, GS-36

Sustain jack ..................................................................GS-9

Sustain part select ...................................................... AF-38

Synchronized start......................................................GS-21

Tap start ..................................................................... GS-34

Tempo ........................................................................GS-20

Tempo change ...........................................................GS-34

Tempo I ...................................................................... GS-34

Tempo pad mode ....................................................... GS-34

Tempo synchro function .............................................GS-35

To disk ........................................................................ AF-46

To disk button ............................................................. AF-42

Tone ........................................................................... AF-30

Touch sensitivity ......................................................... AF-28

Track copy/mix ............................................................. AF-9

Track delete.................................................................. AF-5

Transposition ..............................................................GS-15

Tuning ........................................................................GS-15

Utility........................................................................... AF-49

Variations ...................................................................GS-22

Verse ..........................................................................GS-22

Voice list .....................................................................GS-12

Voice registration........................................................GS-17

Voice select buttons ................................................... GS-13

Voices, selecting ........................................................GS-11

Volume ................................................................... AF-8, 19

Volume settings ....................................................GS-11, 13

Wheel select ............................................................... AF-39

242

MIDI Function Tree • MIDI-Funktionsübersicht • Arbre des fonctions MIDI • Arbol

I. Remote Control Mode

<Reception Conditions> BRch:Basic Receive Channel

PRch:Multi Part Receive Channel

RRch:Rhythm Receive Channel

MIDI FEH ACTIVE SENSING

FAH START

EXT FCH STOP

0 - 0 F8H TIMING CLOCK

TIMING CLOCK

TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

0 - 0 TRANSPOSE

<BRch/PRch> (-) 8nH NOTE OFF

9nH NOTE ON/OFF

<RRch> 8nH NOTE OFF

9nH NOTE ON/OFF

0 - 0 <BRch/PRch/RRch> BnH,07H VOLUME

CONTROL CHANGE SW BnH,0BH EXPRESSION

<BRch/PRch> BnH,01H MODULATION WHEEL

BnH,0AH PAN

BnH,40H SUSTAIN

<BRch> BnH,50H FOOT CONTROLLER

<BRch> BnH,7AH LOCAL CONTROL

BnH,7CH OMNI MODE OFF

BnH,7DH OMNI MODE ON

<BRch/PRch> BnH,7BH ALL NOTE OFF

0 - 0 <BRch/PRch> BnH,00H BANK SELECT MSB

PROGRAM CHANGE SW 20H BANK SELECT LSB

CnH,00H~63H PROGRAM CHANGE

0 - 0 <BRch/PRch> EnH PITCH BENDER

PITCH BENDER SW

0 - 0 <BRch> F0H,43H,0nH,0AH....F7H MEMORY BULK DUMP

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW (PK_ _2239_ _)

F0H,43H,0nH,7CH....F7H PANEL DATA BULK DUMP

(PK_ _2239_ _)

F0H,43H,2nH,0AH,F7H MEMORY BULK DUMP REQ.

F0H,43H,2nH,7CH,F7H PANEL DATA REQ.

F0H,43H,2nH,7DH,F7H NAME DATA REQ.

F0H,43H,76H,04H,gnH....F7H CONTROLLER

F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H SWITCH TO DOC MODE

F0H,7EH,00/7FH,09H,01H,F7H SWITCH TO GM MODE

F0H,43H,73H,01H,02H,F7H INTERNAL CLOCK

F0H,43H,73H,01H,03H,F7H EXTERNAL CLOCK

F0H,43H,73H,01H,10H,F7H CONT./PROG. CHANGE SW OFF

F0H,43H,76H,05H,02H,F7H CONTROL CHANGE SW OFF

F0H,43H,76H,05H,03H,F7H CONTROL CHANGE SW ON

F0H,43H,76H,05H,04H,F7H PROGRAM CHANGE SW OFF

F0H,43H,76H,05H,05H,F7H PROGRAM CHANGE SW ON

F0H,43H,76H,05H,06H,F7H PITCH BENDER SW OFF

F0H,43H,76H,05H,07H,F7H PITCH BENDER SW ON

F0H,43H,76H,05H,08H,F7H SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW OFF

F0H,43H,76H,05H,09H,F7H SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW ON

* Values with an “H” suffix are hexadecimal.

* Bei Werten mit dem Suffix “H” handelt es sich um Hexadezimalwerte.

* Les valeurs précédées du suffixe “H” sont des valeurs hexadécimales.

* Los valores con un sufijo “H” son hexadecimales.

243

de funciones MIDI

<Transmission Conditions> Tch :Transmit Channel

STch :Split Transmit Channel

SeqTch:Sequencer Transmit Channel

ACTIVE SENSE FEH MIDI

START FAH

STOP FCH

INT

TIMING CLOCK F8H 0 - 0

TIMING CLOCK

TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

TRANSPOSE 0 - 0

Panel Data ON

NOTE ON/OFF 9nH n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, (+)

ORCHESTRATION, and pitch.

MODULATION WHEEL BnH,01H n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, 0 - 0

VOLUME* BnH,07H ORCHESTRATION, and others (EXP.PDL CONTROL

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH SEL/WHEEL SEL/SUS.PART SEL). CHANGE SW

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

* Exclusive VOLUME data also available.

FOOT CONTROLLER BnH,50H <Tch>

BANK SELECT BnH,00H n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, 0 - 0

(CUSTOM VOICE SW) 20H ORCHESTRATION, and pitch. PROGRAM

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH, CHANGE SW

00H~63H

PITCH BENDER EnH n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, 0 - 0

ORCHESTRATION, and PITCH BEND PITCH

SEL. BENDER SW

MEMORY BULK DUMP F0H,43H,0nH,0AH....F7H <Tch>

PANEL DATA BULK DUMP

F0H,43H,0nH,7CH....F7H

NAME DATA TRANS. F0H,43H,0nH,7DH....F7H

DOC MODE from REMOTE

F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H

GM MODE from REMOTE

F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,01H.....F7H

Controller F0H,43H,76H,04H,F7H 0 - 0

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

Sequencer Data TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

TRANSPOSE 0 - 0

NOTE ON/OFF 9nH (+) <SeqTch>

MODULATION WHEEL BnH,01H 0 - 0

VOLUME * BnH,07H CONTROL CHANGE SW

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

BANK SELECT BnH,00H 0 - 0

(CUSTOM VOICE) 20H PROGRAM CHANGE SW

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH,00H~63H

PITCH BENDER EnH 0 - 0

PITCH BENDER SW

244

MIDI Function Tree • MIDI-Funktionsübersicht • Arbre des fonctions MIDI • Arbol de funciones MIDI

II. DOC Mode

<Reception Conditions> Kch:Key Channel

MIDI FEH ACTIVE SENSING

FAH START

FCH STOP

TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

0 - 0 TRANSPOSE

<1~10ch> (-) 8nH NOTE OFF

9nH NOTE ON/OFF

<15ch> 8nH NOTE OFF

9nH NOTE ON/OFF

BnH,07H VOLUME

BnH,0BH EXPRESSION

<1~10ch> BnH,01H MODULATION WHEEL

BnH,07H VOLUME

BnH,0AH PAN

BnH,0BH EXPRESSION

BnH,40H SUSTAIN

CnH PROGRAM CHANGE

EnH PITCH BENDER

<Kch> BnH,7AH LOCAL CONTROL

F0H,43H,73H,01H,13H,F7H SWITCH TO REMOTE MODE

F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,01H,F7H SWITCH TO GM MODE

<16ch> F0H,43H,73H,01H,11H,0nH,59H,zz,F7H REVERB TYPE

<Transmission Conditions> Kch:Key Channel

ACTIVE SENSE FEH MIDI

START FAH

STOP FCH

TIMING CLOCK F8H

TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

TRANSPOSE 0 - 0

NOTE ON/OFF 9nH (+) <Kch>

MODULATION WHEEL BnH,01H

VOLUME BnH,07H

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

PITCH BENDER EnH

REMOTE MODE from DOC F0H,43H,73H,01H,13H,F7H

GM MODE from DOC F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,01H,F7H

245

III. GM Mode

<Reception Conditions> Kch:Key Channel

MIDI FEH ACTIVE SENSING

FAH START

FCH STOP

TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

0 - 0 TRANSPOSE

<1~9,11~16ch> (-) 8nH NOTE OFF

9nH NOTE ON/OFF

<10ch> 8nH NOTE OFF

9nH NOTE ON/OFF

BnH,07H VOLUME

BnH,0BH EXPRESSION

<1~9,11~16ch> BnH,01H MODULATION WHEEL

BnH,07H VOLUME

BnH,0AH PAN

BnH,0BH EXPRESSION

BnH,40H SUSTAIN

BnH,06H DATA ENTRY MSB

BnH,26H DATA ENTRY LSB

BnH,64H RPN LSB

BnH,65H RPN MSB

<1~16ch> BnH,5BH REVERB DEPTH

BnH,78H ALL SOUND OFF

BnH,79H RESET ALL CTRLS

BnH,7BH ALL NOTE OFF

<Kch> BnH,7AH LOCAL CONTROL

<1~9,11~16ch> CnH PROGRAM CHANGE

EnH PITCH BENDER

F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,02H,F7H SWITCH TO REMOTE MODE

F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H SWITCH TO DOC MODE

<Transmission Conditions> Kch:Key Channel

ACTIVE SENSE FEH MIDI

START FAH

STOP FCH

TIMING CLOCK F8H

TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE

TRANSPOSE 0 - 0

NOTE ON/OFF 9nH (+) <Kch>

MODULATION WHEEL BnH,01H

VOLUME BnH,07H

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

PITCH BENDER EnH

REMOTE MODE from GM

F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,02H,F7H

DOC MODE from GM F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H

MIDI Function Tree • MIDI-Funktionsübersicht • Arbre des fonctions MIDI • Arbol de funciones MIDI

246

MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI

I. Channel Message

1. VOICE MESSAGE

1-1) 8n : NOTE OFF (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

8 n n: MIDI Channel

0 k k: Key Note Number

0 v v: Velocity

Velocity value ignored.

1-2) 9n : NOTE ON/OFF (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

9 n n: MIDI Channel

0 k k: Key Note Number

0 v v: Velocity 00H~7FH

Key off when velocity = 0.

1-3) Cn : PROGRAM CHANGE

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

C n n: MIDI Channel

0 p p: Program Number

[IN/OUT]

Program Number Remote : 0~99

DOC : 0~87 (Some numbers omitted)

GM1 : 0~127

1-4) En : PITCH BEND CHANGE

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

E n n: MIDI Channel

0 LSB MSB LSB

0 MSB 01111111 01111111 : max

01000000 00000000 : center

00000000 00000000 : min

[IN]

Pitch range. Remote : Depends on voice.

DOC : ±300¢

GM1 : ±200 cents default. Maximum range

±1 octave with RPN.

[OUT]

Pitch bend wheel value output.

1-5) Bn : CONTROL CHANGE

B n n: MIDI Channel

0 c c: Control Number

0 v v: Control Value

c=0 (Bank Select MSB)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

[IN/OUT]

v = 00H, fixed.

c=1 (Modulation Depth)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

[IN]

v= Remote :Depends on voice.

DOC :vibrato depth

GM1 :Depends on voice.

[OUT]

v = modulation wheel value: 00H(min) ~ 7FH(max).

c=7 (Volume) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

[IN]

v= Remote :Corresponds to fader position.

DOC :7FH=0dB,00H=-∞, 0.1875dB/step

GM1 :7FH=0dB,60H=-4.8dB,40H=-11.9dB,

20H=-23.9dB,10H=-36dB,00H=-∞

[OUT]

v= Remote :Corresponds to fader position.

DOC :Actual dB value applied to tone generator in

0.1875 dB steps, according to fader position.

GM1 :Inverse change applied to tone generator in dB,

according to fader position.

0dB=7FH,-4.8dB=60H,-11.9dB=40H,

-23.9dB=20H,.......

c=10 (Pan) (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

[IN]

Remote,GM1 DOC

V= 00H~07H LEFT 7 LEFT 6

08H~0FH 6 6

10H~17H 5 6

18H~1FH 4 5

20H~27H 3 4

28H~2FH 2 3

30H~37H 1 2

38H~3FH CENTER 1

40H VOICE PAN CENTER

41H~47H CENTER CENTER

48H~4FH RIGHT 1 VOICE PAN

50H~57H 2 RIGHT 1

58H~5FH 3 2

60H~67H 4 3

68H~6FH 5 4

70H~77H 6 5

78H~7FH 7 6

c=11 (Expression) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

[IN]

v= Remote : Corresponds to expression position.

DOC : 7FH=0dB,00H=-∞, 0.1875dB/step

GM1 : 7FH=0dB,60H=-4.8dB,40H=-11.9dB,

20H=-23.9dB,10H=-36dB,00H=-∞

[OUT]

v= Remote : Corresponds to expression position.

DOC : Actual dB value applied to tone generator in

0.1875 dB steps, according to expression

position.

GM1 : Inverse change applied to tone generator in dB,

according to expression position.

0dB=7FH,-4.8dB=60H,-11.9dB=40H,

-23.9dB=20h,.......

247

c=32 (Bank Select LSB)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

[IN/OUT]

v= 00H: CustomVoice SW OFF

01H: CustomVoice SW ON

c=64 (Sustain) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

[IN]

v= : 00H~3FH=OFF,40H~7FH=ON

(In DOC mode 00H~2FH=OFF,30H~7FH=ON)

[OUT]

v= : 00H=OFF, 7FH=ON

c=80 (Foot Controller) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

[IN]

v= : 00H~3FH=OFF, 40H~7FH=ON

[OUT]

v= :00H=OFF, 7FH=ON

c=100(RPN LSB) (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O)

=101(RPN MSB)

[IN]

MSB LSB Function

v= 00H 00H Pitch Bend Sense

00H 01H Fine Tuning

00H 02H Coarse Tuning

c=6 (Data Entry MSB) (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O)

=38 (Data Entry LSB)

[IN]

v= Data input according to RPN, above.

Pitch Bend Sense: 1 step = 100/128 cents,

range = 0 ~ 1200 cents.

Fine Tuning: 1 step = 100/8196 cents, range = ±100 cents.

Coarse Tuning: 1 step = 100 cents, range = ±1200 cents.

c=91 (Reverb Depth) (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O)

v = reverb depth 00H(min) ~ 7FH(max)

2. MODE MESSAGE (Reception only)

B n n: MIDI Channel

0 c c: Mode Message

0 v v: Value

Refer to the chart below.

Mode Message

Function Value

Remote

DOC GM1

120 All Sound off 00H~7FH X X

121 Reset All Ctrls 00H~7FH XXO

122 Local Control 00H (off), OOO

All others (on)

123 All Notes Off 00H OXO

124 OMNI Mode Off 00H OXX

125 OMNI Mode On 00H O X X

II. System Message

1. REAL TIME MESSAGE

F8 : TIMING CLOCK (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

Transmission only in DOC & GM1 modes.

FA : START (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

FC : STOP (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

FE :

ACTIVE SENSING (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O)

2. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

(1) MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2nH Substatus/n: Device Number

00001010 0AH Format Number

11110111 F7H EOX

(2) MEMORY BULK DUMP DATA

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0nH Substatus/n: Device Number

00001010 0AH Format Number

0nnnnnnn nn Byte Count MSB

0nnnnnnn nn Byte Count LSB

01010000 50H Header ’P

01001011 4BH ’K

00100000 20H space

00110010 32H ’2

00110011 33H ’3

00111001 39H ’9

00100000 20H space

0nnnnnnn nn Data Number*

0ddddddd dd

: : Data

0ddddddd dd

0sssssss ss Check-sum

11110111 F7H EOX

* DATA NUMBER

00H SYSTEM SET UP DATA

01H VOICE REGISTRATION DATA

02H PANEL REGISTRATION DATA

03H, 04H SUPER STYLE PLAY DATA

05H~07H PAD DATA

08H CUSTOM VOICE DATA

09H~1AH CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT DATA

1BH~2BH SEQUENCER DATA

248

(3) PANEL DATA REQUEST (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2nH Substatus/n: Device Number

01111100 7CH Format Number

11110111 F7H EOX

(4) PANEL DATA BULK DUMP

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0nH Substatus/n: Device Number

01111100 7CH Format Number

0nnnnnnn nn Byte Count MSB

0nnnnnnn nn Byte Count LSB

01010000 50H Header ’P

01001011 4BH ’K

00100000 20H space

00110010 32H ’2

00110011 33H ’3

00111001 39H ’9

00100000 20H space

0vvvvvvv vv Software Version Number

0rrrrrrr rr Software Revision Number

0ddddddd dd

: : Data

0ddddddd dd

0sssssss ss Check-sum

11110111 F7H EOX

(5) NAME DATA REQUEST (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2nH Substatus/n: Device Number

01111101 7DH Format Number

11110111 F7H EOX

(6) NAME DATA TRANSMISSION (Transmission Only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0nH Substatus/n: Device Number

01111101 7DH Format Number

0nnnnnnn nn Byte Count MSB

0nnnnnnn nn Byte Count LSB

01010000 50H Header ’P

01001011 4BH ’K

00100000 20H space

MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI

00100000 20H space

00110010 32H ’2

00110011 33H ’3

00111001 39H ’9

00100000 20H space

0vvvvvvv vv Software Version Number

0rrrrrrr rr Software Revision Number

0ccccccc cc

0ccccccc cc Condition Data

0ccccccc cc

0sssssss ss Check-sum

11110111 F7H EOX

(7) DOC/Remote Control Mode Switching

(7.1) REMOTE CONTROL MODE

(Compatible with Remote: X DOC: O GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H

01110011 73H

00000001 01H

00010011 13H

11110111 F7H EOX

(7.2) DOC MODE (Compatible with Remote:O DOC:X GM1:O)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H

01110011 73H

00000001 01H

00010100 14H

11110111 F7H EOX

(8) GM Level 1/Remote Control Mode Switching

(8.1) REMOTE CONTROL MODE

(Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O)

11110000 F0H Status

01111110 7EH

01111111 <Device ID> 00H or 7FH

00001001 09H

00000010 02H GM Mode Off

11110111 F7H EOX

(8.2) GM Level 1 MODE

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01111110 7EH

01111111 <Device ID> 00H or 7FH

00001001 09H

00000001 01H GM Mode On

11110111 F7H EOX

249

MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI

(9) CLOCK MODE CHANGE

(9.1) INTERNAL MODE (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110011 73H Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard)

00000001 01H Product ID

00000010 02H Internal Clock Mode

11110111 F7H EOX

(9.2) EXTERNAL MODE (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110011 73H Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard)

00000001 01H Product ID

00000011 03H External Clock Mode

11110111 F7H EOX

(10) CONTROL/PROGRAM CHANGE OFF (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110011 73H Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard)

00000001 01H Product ID

00010000 10H MIDI non-sync mode on.

11110111 F7H EOX

(11) CONTROL CHANGE OFF (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00000010 02H Control Change Off

11110111 F7H EOX

(12) CONTROL CHANGE ON (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00000011 03H Control Change On

11110111 F7H EOX

(13) PROGRAM CHANGE OFF (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00000100 04H Program Change Off

11110111 F7H EOX

(14) PROGRAM CHANGE ON (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00000101 05H Program Change On

11110111 F7H EOX

(15) PITCH BEND OFF (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00000110 06H Pitch Bender Off

11110111 F7H EOX

(16) PITCH BEND ON (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00000111 07H Pitch Bender On

11110111 F7H EOX

(17) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE OFF (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00001000 08H System Exclusive Off

11110111 F7H EOX

(18) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE ON (Reception only)

(Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000101 05H

00001001 09H System Exclusive On

11110111 F7H EOX

This command can be received even when system exclusive is OFF.

(19) REVERB TYPE (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: O GM1: X)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110011 73H Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard)

00000001 01H Product ID

00010001 11H

0000nnnn 0nH

01011001 59H

0zzzzzzz zz Reverb Type zz =00 : OFF

11110111 F7H EOX 01 : ROOM

02 : HALL

03 : HALL

04 : OFF

250

3. MIDI EXTENDED CONTROL CHANGE

Reception & Transmission Rules

1 Only controls that are active in each mode are available

for reception and transmission.

2 As for functions, when a data entry button below the

display is pressed a corresponding data entry event is

transmitted rather than than the edited value.

• Reverb and effect type/depth ON events are transmit-

ted simultaneously.

• Harmony type also transmitted simultaneously with an

ON event.

• ABC mode transmitted when ABC turned ON, and

ABC is turned ON when an ABC mode message is

received.

3 For controls such as the DEMO button which is held

while some other operation is performed, an ON event is

transmitted when the button is pressed and an OFF

event is transmitted when the button is released.

4 OFFmON events are transmitted in succession when an

auto-repeat controller is used.

MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI

Règles de réception et de transmission

1 Seules les commandes active dans chaque mode sont

disponibles pour la réception et la transmission.

2 En ce qui concerne les fonctions, lorsqu’une touche

d’introduction de données située sous l’affichage est

sollicitée, un événement d’introduction de donnée

correspondant est transmis à la place de la valeur

éditée.

• Reverb, le type/profondeur d’effet et les événements

ON sont transmis simultanément.

• Le type d’harmonie est également transmis

simultanément avec l’événement ON.

• Le mode ABC est transmis lorsque ABC est activé et

ABC est activé à la réception d’un message ABC

3 Dans le cas de commandes telles que la touche

[DEMO], qui doit maintenue enfoncée pendant que

d’autres opérations sont réalisées, un événement ON est

transmis lorsque la touche est enfoncée et un

événement OFF lorsqu’elle est relâchée.

4 Les événement ONmOFF sont transmis en succession

lorsqu’un contrôleur à répétition automatique est utilisé.

Regeln für Empfang und Übertragung

1 Bei Empfang und Übertragung werden lediglich aktive

Bedien- und Steuerelemente berücksichtigt.

2 Bei Funktionen wird beim Betätigen einer

Dateneingabetaste unter dem Display anstelle eines

editierten Werts ein entsprechendes Dateneingabe-

Ereignis übertragen.

• EIN-Ereignisse (ON) für Hall- und Effekttyp/-tiefe

werden gleichzeitig übertragen.

• Der Harmonietyp wird ebenfalls zusammen mit einem

EIN-Ereignis (ON) übertragen.

• Der Modus der automatischen Baß-/Akkordbegleitung

wird beim Aktivieren der automatischen Baß-/

Akkordbegleitung übertragen, während die

automatische Baß-/Akkordbegleitung selbst beim

Empfang einer entsprechenden Meldung eingeschaltet

wird.

3 Für Bedienelemente wie die DEMO-Taste, die beim

Ausführen eines anderen Vorgangs gedrückt gehalten

wird, wird beim Betätigen der Taste ein EIN-Ereignis

(ON) übertragen und beim Loslassen der Taste ein AUS-

Ereignis (OFF).

4 AUSmEIN-Ereignisse werden bei Verwendung eines

Reglers mit automatischer Wiederholfunktion

aufeinanderfolgend übertragen.

Reglas de recepción y transmisión

1 Para la recepción y transmisión sólo están disponibles

los controles que están activados en cada modo.

2 En cuanto a las funciones, cuando se presiona un botón

de entrada de datos de debajo del visualizador, se

transmite un evento de entrada de datos

correspondiente en lugar del valor editado.

• Los eventos de activación de reverberación y tipo/

profundidad de efecto se transmiten simultáneamente.

• El tipo de armonía también se transmite

simultáneamente con un evento de activación.

• El modo ABC se transmite cuando se activa ABC, y

ABC se activa cuando se recibe un mensaje del modo

ABC.

3 Para los controles tales como el botón DEMO, que se

mantiene retenido mientras se efectúa otra operación, se

transmite un evento de activación cuando se presiona el

botón, y un evento de desactivación cuando se suelta el

botón.

4 Los efectos de desactivación->activación (OFFmON) se

transmiten en sucesión cuando se usa un controlador de

repetición automática.

251

g cc dd Parameter Function

0EH 00H REVERB OFF REVERB/EFFECT OX

01H REVERB ON

(Refer to “3 BYTE

02H REVERB TYPE 1

DATA” for each

part)

18H REVERB TYPE 23

40H EFFECT OFF Transmitted

41H EFFECT ON when ON.

42H EFFECT TYPE 1

4AH EFFECT TYPE 9

11H 00H PANEL REGIST- PANEL OX

: RATION A1 REGISTRATION

0FH PANEL REGIST-

RATION B8

12H 01H PAD MULTI MULTI PAD OX

02H PAD TEMPO

03H

PAD PERCUSSION

06H REPEAT/SYNC/

BREAK OFF

07H REPEAT/SYNC/

BREAK ON

08H

PAD REC/STOP OFF

(When released)

09H

PAD REC/STOP ON

(When pressed)

15H 09H SONG SELECT 1

SEQUENCER SONG

SELECT

0EH SONG SELECT 6

(Sequencer mode se-

lected when received)

17H

00H~7FH

CHORD 1 VOL

. CHORD 1 VOL. OX

18H

00H~7FH

BASS VOL. BASS VOL. OX

19H

00H~7FH

RHYTHM VOL. RHYTHM VOL. OX

1CH

00H~7FH

ORCH. 2 VOL. ORCH. 2 VOL. OX

1DH

00H~7FH

CHORD 2 VOL.

CHORD 2 VOL. OX

1FH 00H VOICE PART VOICE PART OX

SELECT ORCH. 1 SELECT

01H VOICE PART

SELECT ORCH. 2

20H 00H HARMONY OFF HARMONY OX

01H HARMONY ON

02H

HARMONY TYPE 1

Transmitted

: : when ON.

11H

HARMONY TYPE 16

22H 00H DEMO OFF DEMONSTRATION OX

01H DEMO ON

23H 00H VOICE REGIST- VOICE OX

: RATION 1 REGISTRATION

09H VOICE REGIST- MEMORY

RATION 10

Remote

DOC/GM1

g cc dd Parameter Function

0 00H 00H PRESET 0:0 RHYTHM STYLE OX

23H PRESET 5:5

24H CUSTOM 0

29H CUSTOM 5

2AH DISK

01H 00H OFF ABC OX

01H SF Includes

02H FC ABC ON

03H MB

03H 00H

OFF (Release button)

INTRO./FILL IN OX

01H

INTRO./FILL1 ON (Press)

02H

INTRO./FILL2 ON (Press)

04H 00H

INTRO./ENDING ON INTRO./ENDING

(Press)

05H 00H SYNCHRO START SYNCHRO START OX

ON (Press)

08H 7AH -6 TRANSPOSE R X

: :

2’s complement

7FH -1

of 7 bits.

00H 0

: :

06H +6

0BH 01H ORCH. 1 ORCHESTRATION OX

07H ORCH. 2+1

08H ORCH. 2v1

0CH 00H SSP OFF

SUPER STYLE PLAY

01H SSP 1

04H SSP 4

0DH 04H

KEY VELOCITY OFF

KEY VELOCITY R X

05H

KEY VELOCITY ON

Remote

DOC/GM1

(1) 1BYTE DATA FORMAT

(O: Transmit & receive. X: No transmit or receive. R: Receive only)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000100 04H

0gggnnnn gn g=0, n:Local Device Number

0ccccccc cc cc: Controller number

0ddddddd dd Data

11110111 F7H EOX

1BYTE DATA

MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI

252

MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI

g cc dd Parameter Function

24H 00H IA OFF INTERACTIVE OX

01H IA ON ACCOMPANIMENT

02H VERSE1

03H VERSE2

04H CHORUS1

05H CHORUS2

06H SOLO OFF

07H SOLO ON

25H 00H EXIT FUNCTION/ OX

01H FUNCTION 1

06H FUNCTION 6

07H SEQUENCER OFF SEQUENCER OX

08H SEQUENCER ON MODE/

09H

CUS.ACCOMP. OFF

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

0AH

CUS.ACCOMP. ON

MODE

26H 02H EDIT OFF SEQUENCER/ OX

03H EDIT ON CUSTOM

04H

DELETE OFF (When released)

ACCOMP.

05H

DELETE ON (When pressed)

06H

f OFF (When released)

07H

f ON (When pressed)

08H

r OFF (When released)

09H

r ON (When pressed)

0AH

p ON (When pressed)

0BH

RECORD OFF(When released)

0CH

RECORD ON (When pressed)

27H 00H TRACK1/CHORD1 SEQUENCER/ OX

: CUSTOM ACCOMP.

05H TRACK6/CHORD6

06H TRACK7/BASS

07H

ACCOMP/RHYTHM

28H 00H LEFT HOLD OFF LEFT HOLD OX

01H LEFT HOLD ON

29H 00H s PAGE/SHIFT SW OX

01H t

02H <

03H >

2AH 00H LCD SW 1 OFF DATA ENTRY SW OX

(When released)

01H LCD SW 1 ON

(Not transmitted when

(When pressed)

voice or style changed)

02H LCD SW 2 OFF

(When released)

03H LCD SW 2 ON

(When pressed)

04H LCD SW 3 OFF

(When released)

05H LCD SW 3 ON

(When pressed)

06H LCD SW 4 OFF

(When released)

07H LCD SW 4 ON

(When pressed)

2BH 67H 427.5Hz PITCH TUNE R X

2’s complement of 7 bits.

7FH 439.5Hz

00H 440.0Hz

(0.5Hz/Step)

19H 452.5Hz

2CH 00H RE-START RE-START OX

Remote

DOC/GM1

(2) 2BYTE DATA FORMAT

(O: Transmit & receive. X: No transmit or receive. R: Receive only)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000100 04H

0gggnnnn gn g=1, n: Local Device Number

0ccccccc cc cc: Controller number

0ddddddd dd1 Data1

0ddddddd dd2 Data2

11110111 F7H EOX

2BYTE DATA

g cc dd1 dd2 Parameter Function

1 00H 40~280

TEMPO VALUE

TEMPO OX

(Expressed in 14 bits)

01H 00H 00H~7FH PAD 1 PAD ON/OFF OX

01H 00H~7FH PAD 2

02H 00H~7FH PAD 3 dd2≠0:ON

03H 00H~7FH PAD 4 (Press)

04H 00H~7FH PAD 5 dd2∞0:OFF

05H 00H~7FH PAD 6 (Release)

06H 00H~7FH PAD 7

07H 00H~7FH PAD 8

02H 00H 00H~63H PRESET VOICE

ORCH.2 VOICE

01H 00H~63H

CUSTOM VOICE

03H 00H 00H~59H PRESET VOICE MB VOICE OX

01H 00H~59H

CUSTOM VOICE

04H 00H

00H

(Normal)

ORCH. 1

OCTAVE CHANGE

R X

01H (1up)

7FH (1down)

01H

00H (Normal)

ORCH. 2 R X

01H (1up)

7FH (1down)

Remote

DOC/GM1

(3) 3BYTE DATA FORMAT

(O: Transmit & receive. X: No transmit or receive. R: Receive only)

11110000 F0H Status

01000011 43H YAMAHA ID

01110110 76H

Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard)

00000100 04H

0gggnnnn gn g=2, n: Local Device Number

0ccccccc cc cc: Controller number

0ddddddd dd1 Data1

0ddddddd dd2 Data2

0ddddddd dd3 Data3

11110111 F7H EOX

3BYTE DATA

g cc dd1 dd2 dd3

Parameter

Function

2 00H 00H 00H~07H 01H RHYTHM Reverb depth. OX

01H 00H~07H 01H BASS

02H 00H~07H 01H CHORD2

Values for all parts

03H 00H~07H 01H CHORD1

transmitted when

04H 00H~07H 01H ORCH. 2

reverb is turned ON.

05H 00H~07H 01H ORCH. 1

01H 01H 00H~07H 01H BASS Effect depth. OX

02H 00H~07H 01H CHORD2

Values for all parts

03H 00H~07H 01H CHORD1

transmitted when

04H 00H~07H 01H ORCH. 2

effect is turned ON.

05H 00H~07H 01H ORCH. 1

Remote

DOC/GM1

253

DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List

Stimmenverzeichnis für DOC-Modus (Disk Orchestra Collection)

Liste des voix du mode DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC)

Lista de Voces del modo DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC)

Number Name Display

00 BRASS Brass

01 TRUMPET Trumpet

02 FRENCH HORN Fr.Horn

03 SAX 1 Sax 1

04 CLARINET Clarinet

05 OBOE Oboe

06 FLUTE 1 Flute 1

07 ACCORDION Acordion

08 STRINGS 1 Strings1

09 VIOLIN 1 Violin 1

10 FULL ORGAN FullOrgn

11 JAZZ ORGAN 1 JazzOrg1

12 PIANO 1 Piano 1

13 ELECTRIC PIANO 1 E.Piano1

14 HARPSICHORD Harpsi.

15 CELESTA Celesta

16 VIBES Vibes

17 MARIMBA Marimba

18 CLAVI Clavi

19 GLOCKEN Glocken

20 SYNTH BRASS SynBrass

21 —

22 CRYSTAL Crystal

23 TIMPANI Timpani

24 GUT GUITAR Gut Gtr

25 JAZZ GUITAR 1 JazzGtr1

26 ROCK GUITAR 1 RockGtr1

27 SITAR Sitar

28 ACOUSTIC BASS 1 Aco.Bas1

29 ELECTRIC BASS 1 E.Bass 1

30 ELECTRIC BASS 2 E.Bass 2

31 SYNTH BASS Syn.Bass

32 —

33 —

34 —

35 —

36 —

37 —

38 —

39 —

40 MUTE TRUMPET Mute Trp

41 HARMONICA Hamonica

42 CHOIR Choir

43 JAZZ ORGAN 1 JazzOrg1

Number Name Display

44 SYNTH WOOD Syn.Wood

45 SYNTH STRINGS Syn.Str

46 SYNTH CHOIR SynChoir

47 PIANO 1 Piano 1

48 PIANO 2 Piano 2

49 HONKY-TONK PIANO HnkyTonk

50 ELECTRIC PIANO 2 E.Piano2

51 BRIGHT PIANO BritePno

52 BRIGHT PIANO BritePno

53 FOLK GUITAR Folk Gtr

54 ROCK GUITAR 1 RockGtr1

55 BANJO Banjo

56 PIZZICATO STRINGS Pizz.Str

57 HARP Harp

58 STEEL DRUM SteelDrm

59 —

60 BRASS DECAY Brass D.

61 FLUTE DECAY Flute D.

62 STRINGS DECAY StringsD

63 CHOIR DECAY Choir D.

64 FULL ORGAN DECAY FullOrgD

65 JAZZ ORGAN DECAY JazzOrgD

66 SYNTH BRASS DECAY SynBrasD

67 SAX DECAY Sax D.

68 CLAVINOVA TONE Clavnova

69 ROCK GUITAR 2 RockGtr2

70 MUTE GUITAR Mute Gtr

71 ACOUSTIC BASS 2 Aco.Bas2

72 JAZZ GUITAR 2 JazzGtr2

73 POP BRASS PopBrass

74 STRINGS 2 Strings2

75 VIOLIN 2 Violin 2

76 ORGAN Organ

77 SAX 2 Sax 2

78 ELECTRIC BASS 3 E.Bass 3

79 FLUTE 2 Flute 2

80 BASSOON Bassoon

81 CHAMBER STRINGS Chamber

82 JAZZ ORGAN 2 JazzOrg2

83 —

84 —

85 —

86 —

87 ORCHESTRA HIT Orch.Hit

254

Number Group Name (GM) Display

65 Reed Soprano Sax SprnoSax

66 Alto Sax Alto Sax

67 Tenor Sax TenorSax

68 Baritone Sax Bari.Sax

69 Oboe Oboe

70 English Horn Eng.Horn

71 Bassoon Bassoon

72 Clarinet Clarinet

73 Pipe Piccolo Piccolo

74 Flute Flute

75 Recorder Recorder

76 Pan Flute PanFlute

77 Blown Bottle Bottle

78 Shakuhachi Shakhchi

79 Whistle Whistle

80 Ocarina Ocarina

81 Synth Lead Lead 1 (square) SquareLd

82 Lead 2 (sawtooth) Saw.Lead

83 Lead 3 (calliope) CaliopLd

84 Lead 4 (chiff) Chiff Ld

85 Lead 5 (charang) CharanLd

86 Lead 6 (voice) Voice Ld

87 Lead 7 (fifths) Fifth Ld

88 Lead 8 (bass+lead) Bass &Ld

89 Synth Pad Pad 1 (new age) NewAgePd

90 Pad 2 (warm) Warm Pad

91 Pad 3 (polysynth) PolySyPd

92 Pad 4 (choir) ChoirPad

93 Pad 5 (bowed) BowedPad

94 Pad 6 (metallic) MetalPad

95 Pad 7 (halo) Halo Pad

96 Pad 8 (sweep) SweepPad

97 Synth Effects FX 1 (rain) Rain

98 FX 2 (soundtrack) SoundTrk

99 FX 3 (crystal) Crystal

100 FX 4 (atmosphere) Atmosphr

101 FX 5 (brightness) Bright

102 FX 6 (goblins) Goblins

103 FX 7 (echoes) Echoes

104 FX 8 (sci-fi) SF

105 Ethnic Sitar Sitar

106 Banjo Banjo

107 Shamisen Shamisen

108 Koto Koto

109 Kalimba Kalimba

110 Bagpipe Bagpipe

111 Fiddle Fiddle

112 Shanai Shanai

113 Percussive Tinkle Bell TnklBell

114 Agogo Agogo

115 Steel Drums SteelDrm

116 Woodblock WoodBlok

117 Taiko Drum TaikoDrm

118 Melodic Tom MelodTom

119 Synth Drum Syn.Drum

120 Reverse Cymbal RevCymbl

121 Sound Effects Guitar Fret Noise FretNoiz

122 Breath Noise BrthNoiz

123 Seashore Seashore

124 Bird Tweet Tweet

125 Telephone Ring Telphone

126 Helicopter Helicptr

127 Applause Applause

128 Gunshot Gunshot

GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List • Stimmenverzeichnis für GM-Modus (General MIDI)

Liste des voix du mode GENERAL MIDI (GM) • Lista de voces del modo GENERAL MIDI (GM)

Number Group Name (GM) Display

01 Piano Acoustic Grand Piano GrandPno

02 Bright Acoustic Piano BritePno

03 Electric Grand Piano E.Grand

04 Honky-tonk Piano HnkyTonk

05 Electric Piano 1 E.Piano1

06 Electric Piano 2 E.Piano2

07 Harpsichord Harpsi.

08 Clavi Clavi.

09 Chromatic Celesta Celesta

10 Percussion Glockenspiel Glocken

11 Music Box MusicBox

12 Vibraphone Vibes

13 Marimba Marimba

14 Xylophone Xylophon

15 Tubular Bells TubulBel

16 Dulcimer Dulcimer

17 Organ Drawbar Organ DrawOrgn

18 Percussive Organ PercOrgn

19 Rock Organ RockOrgn

20 Church Organ ChrchOrg

21 Reed Organ ReedOrgn

22 Accordion Acordion

23 Harmonica Harmnica

24 Tango Accordion TangoAcd

25 Guitar Acoustic Guitar (nylon) NylonGtr

26 Acousitic Guitar (steel) SteelGtr

27 Electric Guitar (jazz) Jazz Gtr

28 Electric Guitar (clean) CleanGtr

29 Electric Guitar (muted) Mute.Gtr

30 Overdriven Guitar Ovrdrive

31 Distortion Guitar Dist.Gtr

32 Guitar Harmonics GtrHarmo

33 Bass Acoustic Bass Aco.Bass

34 Electric Bass (finger) FngrBass

35 Electric Bass (pick) PickBass

36 Fretless Bass Fretless

37 Slap Bass 1 SlapBas1

38 Slap Bass 2 SlapBas2

39 Synth Bass 1 SynBass1

40 Synth Bass 2 SynBass2

41 Strings Violin Violin

42 Viola Viola

43 Cello Cello

44 Contrabass ContraBs

45 Tremolo Strings Trem.Str

46 Pizzicato Strings Pizz.Str

47 Orchestral Harp Harp

48 Timpani Timpani

49 Ensemble String Ensemble 1 Strings1

50 String Ensemble 2 Strings2

51 Synth Strings 1 Syn.Str1

52 Synth Strings 2 Syn.Str2

53 Choir ∞hs Choir∞h

54 Voice Oohs VoiceOoh

55 Synth Voice SynVoice

56 Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit

57 Brass Trumpet Trumpet

58 Trombone Trombone

59 Tuba Tuba

60 Muted Trumpet Mute.Trp

61 French Horn Fr.Horn

62 Brass Section BrasSect

63 Synth Brass 1 SynBras1

64 Synth Brass 2 SynBras2

255

PSR-5700 Percussion Map • PSR-5700 Schlagzeugklang-Verzeichnis

Carte de batterie du PSR-5700 • Mapa de percusión del PSR-5700

* refer to this map when receiveing MIDI data on the rhythm channel.

* Richten Sie sich zum Empfang von MIDI-Daten auf dem

Rhythmuskanal nach diesem Verzeichnis.

125 F8 Cowbell Hi

126 F#8 Agogo Low

127 G8 Dropping Coin

• C1 … B5 are included in voice number 98 Drum Kit.

• C-1 … B0 are the lower 2 octaves on voice number 99 Pop Drum Kit

(C1 … B2).

C6 … G8 are the upper 2.5 octaves (C3 … G5).

•Ab5 … C6 are included in both voice numbers 98 Drum Kit and 99 Pop

Drum Kit.

• C1 ... B5 sind Teil der “Schlagzeug-Stimme” DRUM KIT (Nr. 98).

• C1 ... B0 entsprechen den unteren beiden Oktaven bei der

“Schlagzeugstimme” POP DRUM KIT (Nr. 99) (C1 ... B2).

C6 ... B8 entsprechen den oberen zweieinhalb Oktaven (C3 ... G5).

•Ab5 ... C6 sind Teil beider “Schlagzeug-Stimmen”, DRUM KIT (Nr.

98) und POP DRUM KIT (Nr. 99).

* Reportez-vous à cette carte en cas de réception de données MIDI sur

le canal de rythme

* consulte este mapa para recibir datos MIDI en el canal de ritmo.

Key (MIDI)

Note Name

Number

12 C-1 Hand Claps

13 Db-1 Triangle Close

14 D-1 Whistle Low

15 Eb-1 Triangle Open

16 E-1 Whistle Hi

17 F-1 Kick 5

18 F#-1 Kick 6

19 G-1 Kick 7

20 Ab-1 Kick 8

21 A-1 Tom Bass

22 Bb-1 Rim Shot 2

23 B-1 Tom Low

24 C0 Tom Mid

25 Db0 Snare 7

26 D0 Tom Hi

27 Eb0 Snare 8

28 E0 Snare 9

29 F0 Snare 3

30 F#0 Snare 10

31 G0 Snare 11

32 Ab0 Brush Hit 2

33 A0 Snare Roll

34 Bb0 Snare Brush Squeeze

35 B0 Pedal Hi-Hat 2

36 C1 Applause

37 Db1 Triangle Close

38 D1 Whistle Low

39 Eb1 Triangle Open

40 E1 Whistle Hi

41 F1 Kick 1

42 F#1 Kick 2

43 G1 Kick 3

44 Ab1 Kick 4

45 A1 Tom 1 Bass

46 Bb1 Rim Shot 1

47 B1 Tom 1 Low

48 C2 Tom 1 Mid

49 Db2 Snare 1

50 D2 Tom 1 Hi

Key (MIDI) Note Name

Number

51 Eb2 Snare 2

52 E2 Snare 3

53 F2 Snare 4

54 F#2 Snare 5

55 G2 Snare 6

56 Ab2 Brush Hit 1

57 A2 Snare Roll

58 Bb2 Snare Brush Squeeze

59 B2 Pedal Hi-Hat 1

60 C3 Closed Hi-Hat 1

61 Db3 Timbales Low

62 D3 Open Hi-Hat 1

63 Eb3 Timbales Hi

64 E3 Closed Hi-Hat 2

65 F3 Open Hi-Hat 2

66 F#3 Conga 1 Low

67 G3 Ride Cymbal 1

68 Ab3 Conga 1 Hi

69 A3 Ride Cup 1

70 Bb3 Conga 1 Mute

71 B3 Crash Cymbal 1

72 C4 Crash Cymbal 2

73 Db4 Bongo Low

74 D4 Splash Cymbal

75 Eb4 Bongo Hi

76 E4 March Cymbal

77 F4 Surdo

78 F#4 Cabasa

79 G4 Tom Brush Low

80 Ab4 Vibraslap

81 A4 Tom Brush Mid

82 Bb4 Claves

83 B4 Tom Brush Hi

84 C5 Guiro Long

85 Db5 Cuica Low

86 D5 Guiro Short

87 Eb5 Cuica Hi

88 E5 Tambourine

89 F5 Cowbell Low

Key (MIDI) Note Name

Number

90 F#5 Agogo Low

91 G5 Castanet

92 Ab5 Agogo Hi

93 A5 Finger Snaps

94 Bb5 Cross Sticks

95 B5 —

96 C6 Closed Hi-Hat 2

97 Db6 Timbales Low

98 D6 Open Hi-Hat 2

99 Eb6 Timbales Hi

100 E6 Closed Hi-Hat 3

101 F6 Open Hi-Hat 3

102 F#6 Conga 2 Low

103 G6 Ride Cymbal 2

104 Ab6 Conga 2 Hi

105 A6 Ride Cup 2

106 Bb6 Conga 2 Mute

107 B6 Crash Cymbal 1

108 C7 Crash Cymbal 2

109 Db7 Bongo Low

110 D7 Chinese Cymbal

111 Eb7 Bongo Hi

112 E7 Reverse Cymbal

113 F7 E.Tom Bass

114 F#7 Maracas

115 G7 E.Tom Low

116 Ab7 Vibraslap

117 A7 E.Tom Mid

118 Bb7 Wood Block

119 B7 E.Tom Hi

120 C8 Guiro Long

121 Db8 Scratch Noise Low

122 D8 Guiro Short

123 Eb8 Scratch Noise Hi

124 E8 Running Water

• C1 ... B5 inclus dans la voix 98 Drum Kit.

• C-1 .. B0 sont les 2 octaves les plus basses de la voix numéro 99 Pop Drum

Kit (C1 ... B2).

C6 ... G8 sont les 2,5 octaves les plus hautes (C3 ... G5).

•Ab5 .. C6 inclus dans les deux voix 98 Drum Kit et 99 Pop Drum Kit.

• C1 ... B5 se incluyen en el número de voz 98 Drum Kit.

• C1 ... B0 son las 2 octavas inferiores del número de voz 99 Pop Drum

Kit (C1 ... B2).

C6 ... G8 son las 2,5 octavas superiores (G3 ... G5).

•Ab5 ... C6 se incluyen en los números de voz 98 Drum Kit y 99 Pop

Drum Kit.

256

GM/DOC MODE Percussion Map • Schlagzeugklang-Verzeichnis für DOC/GM-Modus

Carte de batterie en mode DOC/GM • Mapa de percusión del modo DOC/GM MODE

Key (MIDI)

Note GM Name DOC Name

Number

30 F#0 — Snare Brush

31 G0 — —

32 Ab0 — Closed Hi-Hat Heavy

33 A0 — —

34 Bb0 — Crash Cymbal Light

35 B0 Acoustic Bass Drum Bass Drum Light

36 C1 Bass Drum 1 Snare Drum+Rim Heavy

37 Db1 Side Stick Ride Cup

38 D1 Acoustic Snare Snare Drum+Rim Light

39 Eb1 Hand Clap —

40 E1 Electric Snare —

41 F1 Low Floor Tom Bass Drum

42 F#1 Closed Hi-Hat Rim Shot

43 G1 High Floor Tom Snare Drum Heavy

44 Ab1 Pedal Hi-Hat Snare Brush Shot

45 A1 Low Tom Snare Drum Light

46 Bb1 Open Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat

47 B1 Low-Mid Tom Snare Drum Echo

48 C2 Hi-Mid Tom Tom 4

49 Db2 Crash Cymbal 1 Closed Hi-Hat

50 D2 High Tom Tom 3

51 Eb2 Ride Cymbal 1 Open Hi-Hat

52 E2 Chinese Cymbal Tom 2

53 F2 Ride Bell Tom 1

54 F#2 Tambourine Ride Cymbal

55 G2 Splash Cymbal Electronic Tom 3

56 Ab2 Cowbell Crash Cymbal

57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2 Electronic Tom 2

58 Bb2 Vibraslap Crash Cymbal

59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2 Electronic Tom 1

60 C3 Hi Bongo Conga Low

61 Db3 Low Bongo Cabasa

62 D3 Mute Hi Conga Conga High

63 Eb3 Open Hi Conga Metronome

64 E3 Low Conga Bongo

65 F3 High Timbale Timbale Low

66 F#3 Low Timbale Claves

67 G3 High Agogo Timbale High

68 Ab3 Low Agogo Castanets

69 A3 Cabasa Cuica Low

70 Bb3 Maracas Cowbell

71 B3 Short Whistle Cuica High

72 C4 Long Whistle Hand Claps

73 Db4 Short Guiro Agogo Low

74 D4 Long Guiro —

75 Eb4 Claves Agogo High

76 E4 Hi Wood Block Bongo Low

77 F4 Low Wood Block Cuica Low

78 F#4 Mute Cuica Tambourine

79 G4 Open Cuica Crash Cymbal

80 Ab4 Mute Triangle Triangle Closed

81 A4 Open Triangle Snare Brush

82 Bb4 — Triangle Open

257

YAMAHA [ Portatone ] Date : 07/23 1992

Model PSR-5700 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+

: : Transmitted : Recognized : Remarks :

: Function : : : :

:–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+

:Basic Default : 1-16 : 1-16 : memorized :

:Channel Changed : 1-16 : 1-16 : :

: Default : 3 : 1,3 *2 : memorized :

:Mode Messages : X : OMNIon,OMNIoff : :

: Altered : ************** : X : :

:Note : 36-96 : 0-127 : :

:Number : True voice: ************** : 0-127 : :

:Velocity Note on : O 9nH,v=1-127 : O v=1-127 : :

: Note off : X 9nH,v=0 : X : :

:After Key’s : X : X : :

:Touch Ch’s : X : X : :

:Pitch Bender : O : O 0-12 semi *1:7bit resolution :

: 0,32 : O *2 : O *2 :Bank Select :

: 1 : O : O :Modulation :

: 6,38 : X : O *3 :Data Entry :

:Control 7 : O : O :Volume :

: 10 : X : O :Pan :

:Change 11 : O : O :Expression :

: 64 : O : O :Sustain :

: 80 : O *2 : O *2 :Foot Controller :

: 91 : X : O *3 :Reverb Depth :

: 100,101 : X : O *3 :RPN LSB,MSB :

: 120 : X : O *3 :All Sound Off :

: 121 : X : O *3 :Reset All Ctrls :

: : : : :

:Program : O 0-99 *4 : O 0-99 *4 : :

:Change : True # : ************** : 0-99 *4 : :

:System Exclusive : O : O : :

:System : Song Pos : X : X : :

: : Song.Sel : X : X : :

:Common : Tune : X : X : :

:System :Clock : O : O *2 : :

:Real Time:Commands : O : O : :

:Aux :Local ON/OFF : X : O : :

: :All Notes OFF: X : O (122-125) *5: :

:Mes- :Active Sense : O : O : :

:sages:Reset : X : X : :

:Notes : *1 = 0-3 if DOC mode is on :

: *2 = only remote control mode :

: *3 = only GM mode :

: *4 = 0-127 if GM mode is on 0-87 if DOC mode is on :

: *5 = 122-123 if GM mode is on 122 if DOC mode is on :

:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X : No

258

KEYBOARD:

61 Keys (C1~C6) with Touch Response

POLYPHONY:

38 notes max.

VOICES:

Preset 100 voices

Custom 100 voices (Programmable)

ACCOMPANIMENT:

INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT:

Preset 36 styles

Disk 1 style

* 5 variations for each style

CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT:

6 styles + INTRO/FILL/ENDING (Programmable)

SUPER STYLE PLAY:

Preset 36 styles

Disk 1 style

* 4 variations for each style

EFFECT:

Reverb based effect 23 types, Chorus based effect 9 types,

Harmony 16 types

PERCUSSION:

Keyboard; 92 (Percussion + Sound Effect)

PAD:

8 (MULTI/PERC./TEMPO)

AUTO BASS CHORD:

Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Manual Bass

SEQUENCER:

8 Tracks, 6 Songs

REGISTRATION:

VOICE REGISTRATION: 10

PANEL REGISTRATION: 16

DISPLAY:

LED, LCD

DISK DRIVE:

3.5” FDD, Compatibility with DOC (Yamaha Disk Orchestra

Collection) and General MIDI software

DEMONSTRATION:

4 Songs

CONNECTORS:

MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), FOOT SW., SUSTAIN, EXP. PEDAL,

HEADPHONES, AUX. IN (R, L/L+R), AUX. OUT (R, L/L+R)

AMPLIFIER:

10W x 2

SPEAKERS:

16cm (6-5/16") x 2, 5cm (1-5/16") x 2

DIMENSIONS (W x D x H):

1067mm (42") x 409mm (16-1/8") x 160mm (6-5/16")

WEIGHT:

15.0 kg (33.1lbs.)

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES:

• Music Stand

• FC5 Foot Switch

• Sample Data Disk

• “Getting Started” Manual

• “Advanced Features” Manual

* Specifications subject to change without notice.

Specifications • Technische Daten • Spécifications • Especificaciones

Transcripción de documentos

OWNER’S MANUAL Advanced Features BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG Programmieranleitung MODE D’EMPLOI Fonctions avancées MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES Características avanzadas The PSR-5700 Advanced Features manual contains operating instructions for the instrument’s more complex and advanced features. If you are yet familiar with PSR-5700’s basic features and the way it works in general, we recommend that you go through the PSR-5700 Getting Started manual prior to attempting to use the features described in this manual. Contents The Sequencer .................................................................... 3 ■ Recording ....................................................................... 3 ■ Deleting Tracks ............................................................... 5 ■ Playback ......................................................................... 6 ■ Sequence Editing ........................................................... 7 E1 CONDITION/REC TYPE ............................................. 7 E2 VOLUME ................................................................... 8 E3 TRACK COPY/MIX ..................................................... 9 E4 QUANTIZE .............................................................. 10 E5 DELETE ALL TRACKS ............................................. 11 E6 INSERT ALL TRACKS .............................................. 12 E7 ERASE ................................................................... 12 E8 REMOVE EVENT ..................................................... 13 E9 NOTE SHIFT ........................................................... 14 E10 SONG CLEAR ....................................................... 14 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ............... 15 ■ Basic Programming Procedure ..................................... 15 ■ Using a Custom Accompaniment ................................. 18 ■ Custom Accompaniment Editing .................................. 19 1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. (Measure/Beat) ............................ 19 2 VOLUME ................................................................... 19 3 FADER SELECT ........................................................ 20 4 NAME ....................................................................... 20 5 SAVE TO ACCOMP. ................................................... 20 6 QUANTIZE ................................................................ 21 7 COPY ....................................................................... 22 8 REMOVE EVENT ....................................................... 23 9 CHANGE PATTERN ................................................... 23 • CREATING INTRO, FILL-IN, & ENDING PATTERNS ...... 24 • EXITING FROM THE CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT MODE ....................................................................... 25 Other Functions ................................................................ 26 ■ General Function Selection & Editing Procedure ......... 26 [F1] Custom Voice Edit ................................................... 27 ■ Standard Voice Edit Functions (Voices 00 through 89) .... 27 1 NAME ....................................................................... 27 2 COMMON ................................................................. 28 3 MODULATION ........................................................... 28 4 EG RATE .................................................................. 29 5 TONE ....................................................................... 30 ■ Dual Voice Edit Functions (Voices 90 through 97) ........... 30 1 DUAL NAME .............................................................. 30 2 DUAL VOICE ............................................................. 31 3 DUAL OCTAVE .......................................................... 31 4 DUAL VOLUME ......................................................... 31 5 DUAL PAN ................................................................ 32 6 DUAL DETUNE .......................................................... 32 ■ Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voices 98 and 99) ............... 33 1 PERC. NAME ............................................................ 33 2 PERC. PITCH ............................................................ 33 3 PERC. PAN ............................................................... 34 4 PERC. TONE ............................................................. 34 2 [F2] Reverb, Effect ............................................................ 35 1 2 3 4 REVERB TYPE .......................................................... 35 REVERB DEPTH ....................................................... 35 EFFECT TYPE ........................................................... 36 EFFECT DEPTH ........................................................ 36 [F3] Controller & Key Velocity ....................................... 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 KEY VELOCITY ......................................................... 37 FOOT SWITCH SELECT ............................................ 37 EXP. PEDAL SELECT ................................................ 38 SUSTAIN PART SELECT ............................................ 38 PITCH BEND SELECT ............................................... 39 WHEEL SELECT ....................................................... 39 [F4] Split Point, Interactive Accompaniment, & Super Style Play Mode ........................................... 40 1 SPLIT POINT ............................................................. 40 2 INTERACTIVE ACCOMP. ........................................... 40 3 SUPER STYLE PLAY MODE ....................................... 41 [F5] Disk .............................................................................. 42 ■ The [TO DISK] Button ................................................... 42 ■ The [FROM DISK] Button ............................................. 44 ■ The [F5] DISK Functions .............................................. 45 1 FROM DISK .............................................................. 45 2 TO DISK ................................................................... 46 3 RENAME FILE ........................................................... 46 4 DELETE FILE ............................................................ 47 5 FORMAT DISK .......................................................... 47 6 DISK FREE AREA ...................................................... 47 • Disk Error Messages .................................................. 48 [F6] Utility & MIDI .............................................................. 49 1 MEMORY BACKUP .................................................... 49 2 RECALL INITIAL DATA ............................................... 50 ■ The [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] Button ...... 50 3 MIDI CHANNEL SETTING ........................................... 54 4 MULTI PART SETTING .............................................. 56 5 MIDI SWITCH ............................................................ 56 6 MIDI SYSTEM ........................................................... 57 7 DATA TRANSMIT ...................................................... 58 Index ..................................................................................... 59 MIDI Function Tree ......................................................... 242 MIDI Messages .............................................................. 246 DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List ................. 253 GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List .......................... 254 PSR-5700 Percussion Map ............................................ 255 GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map .................................... 256 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................ 257 Specificationes ............................................................... 258 The Sequencer The PSR-5700 features an 8-track sequencer that allows you to record and play back original musical creations — along with auto accompaniment if required. You can record the accompaniment and orchestra parts separately or at the same time. If, for example, you record the accompaniment first and then record your own performance while listening to playback of the accompaniment, you’re free to use the entire keyboard for your performance rather than being limited to only the upper keyboard area. You can also play back each part independently or in any combination. For even further versatility, the PSR-5700 sequencer allows different songs to be saved to or re-loaded from floppy disk. Recording As you become more familiar with the PSR-5700 sequencer you’ll probably develop a recording procedure that best suits your particular musical requirements. Here, to get you started, is the most simple, straightforward way to approach sequencer recording. ZEngage the Sequencer SONG SELECT SEQUENCER 1 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROG Press the [SEQUENCER] button to engage the sequencer. “SEQ” will appear on the TEMPO display if the currently selected song contains no data, or the measure number will appear if the song does contain data. The number-1 indicator to the right of the [SONG SELECT] button will also light. If the sequencer contains previously recorded data, the green PLAY indicators of tracks containing data will light when the sequencer is engaged. Any of these tracks can be muted prior to engaging the record-ready mode (below) by pressing the corresponding track button so that the green PLAY indicator flashes. The sequencer can also be engaged by pressing one of the track buttons, or by pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. DETAIL XSelect a Song Number SEQUENCER SONG SELECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER CSet Up All Record Parameters The PSR-5700 sequencer can record up to 6 separate songs. Use the [SONG SELECT] button to select the song number you want to record. The selected song number is shown by the indicators, 1 through 6, to the right of the [SONG SELECT] button. Select the accompaniment style you want to record with, voices, orchestration, harmony, and other parameters before actually beginning recording. A list of the parameters that can be recorded by the PSR-5700 sequencer is given below. You may also need to select a specific record mode and other conditions accessible via the sequencer’s CONDITION/RECORD TYPE functions, described on page 7. 3 The Sequencer Recordable Parameters Tracks 1 — 7 • Note on/off • Pitch bend • Modulation • Sustain on/off • Orchestra 1 & 2 volume • Voice change (including custom voice on/off) • Tempo (if ACCOMP. track contains no data) • Glide on/off • Percussion pad on/off* • Tempo pad tempo value* • Multi pad on/off (phrase only)* * The pad mode selected when the sequence is played back will be used. Accompaniment Track • Chord & root (note on/off in Manual Bass mode) • Style change (styles with the same time signature only) • Rhythm volume • Bass volume • Chord 1 volume • Chord 2 volume • Tempo • Reverb on/off & depth • Reverb type • Effect on/off & depth • Effect type • Effect control • Harmony on/off and type • Interactive Accompaniment on/off • Interactive Accompaniment variation • Interactive Accompaniment mode & sensitivity • Auto Bass Chord mode • Percussion Pad on/off • Pad function (Multi/Tempo/Perc) • Repeat/Synchro/Break on/off • Manual bass on/off, voice • Intro, fill in & ending • Chord pad chord sequence • Tempo pad tempo value When the sequencer mode is engaged all previous panel settings are ignored. IMPORTANT If the record and playback pad modes are different, pad on/off events will not be reproduced. DETAIL DETAIL If parameter changes are memorized using the Voice Registration, Panel Registration, or Super Styleplay features during recording, only those parameters that can be recorded on the current track will be memorized. The time signature cannot be changed once a song has been recorded. DETAIL VSelect the Record Track(s) PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment can only be recorded on the ACCOMP. track. The ORCH.1 and ORCH.2 voices can be recorded on any of the remaining 7 tracks, but only one of these tracks can be recorded at a time if the normal ORCH.1 orchestration is selected. If the ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected, two record tracks must be selected — the ORCH.1 voice will be recorded on the lower-numbered track while the ORCH.2 voice will be recorded on the higher-numbered track. This means that a maximum of three record tracks can be specified when the ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected: ACCOMP. and any two numbered tracks. To select the record track(s) and engage the record-ready mode, hold the [RECORD] button and press the appropriate track button(s). The red REC indicator for the tracks will flash. Also note that the AUTO BASS CHORD indicator will light automatically when the ACCOMP. track is selected. PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM DETAIL HINT 4 RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f The upper markings on the track buttons apply when the SEQUENCER mode is engaged (1 through 7, and ACCOMP.). The lower markings when the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER described on page 15 is operating. If you are adding new material to tracks that have already been recorded, the [r] and [f] buttons can be used at this point to move to any measure number from which you want to begin recording. The [r] and [f] buttons will not function once recording has been started. The Sequencer BStart Recording SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START Recording will start as soon as the [START/RE-START] button is pressed or, if you also press the [SYNCHRO START] button, as soon as any key on the keyboard is pressed. If the ACCOMP. track is selected and you start recording by pressing the [START/RE-START] button, only the rhythm will play until the first chord (FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER) is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard. If you start recording in the SYNCHRO START mode by playing on the righthand section of the keyboard, a metronome will sound in place of the rhythm and AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment until a key is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard. STOP FILL IN j FILL IN n ENDING/ rit. INTRO.1 INTRO.2 INTRO.3 Before starting recording you can also choose an introduction by pressing any of the [INTRO.] buttons. HINT The restart function can not be used while the sequencer mode is engaged. DETAIL Previously recorded fill-ins may not always be erased if that section is re-recorded or deleted. DETAIL NPlay Play the accompaniment and/or orchestra parts. The current measure number is shown on the TEMPO display as you record. MStop Recording SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP FILL IN j FILL IN n ENDING/ rit. INTRO.1 INTRO.2 INTRO.3 Press the [STOP] button to stop recording immediately, or the [ENDING/rit.] button to finish off the recording with an appropriate ending. The first measure of the sequence is automatically selected when recording is stopped. <Record a New Track To record a new track, simply select a new voice and other parameters as required, select a new track as described in step 4, then record. All previously recorded tracks will automatically be set to the PLAY mode so you can record the new material while listening to the material you’ve already recorded. Repeat this procedure until your sequence is complete. DETAIL Up to approximately 7,000 notes can be recorded for all six sequencer songs. The exact number of notes that can be recorded, however, will depend on the type of data you record. Deleting Tracks If you make a mistake while recording or simply want to delete a track from your sequence, press the track button corresponding to the track you want to delete while holding the [DELETE] button. PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f Tracks cannot be deleted during recording or playback. DETAIL 5 The Sequencer Playback ZStart Playback SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f PLAY 7 Since tracks are automatically set to the PLAY mode once they have been recorded, and tracks containing data are automatically set to the PLAY mode when the sequencer is initially engaged by pressing the [SEQUENCER] button, all you have to do to play back a sequence is to press the [START/RE-START] button. If you first press the [SYNCHRO START] button, sequencer playback can be started by playing any key on the keyboard. Any of the PLAY tracks can be muted before or during playback by pressing the corresponding track button. The PLAY indicator will flash when a track is muted. Normal playback can be restored by pressing the track buttons of muted tracks a second time (the PLAY indicator will light continuously). BAS HINT DETAIL XPlay along If You Like Before starting playback you can use the [r] and [f] buttons to move to any measure number from which you want to begin playback. The [p] button goes directly to measure number 1. If the Super Styleplay section change parameter (page 41) is turned ON during ACCOMP. track playback, the Super Styleplay section will change in accordance with accompaniment variation transitions and the result may be different from the recorded data. You can play along with the sequence using the entire PSR-5700 keyboard, selecting different voices and changing the tempo as required (subsequently recorded tempo changes will still take effect). Parameters That Can Be Changed During Playback • Style select (styles with different time signatures cannot be selected) • Volume (rhythm, bass, chord 1 & chord 2) • Tempo • Reverb & effect on/off • Pad repeat and break on/off • Interactive Accompaniment on/off & accompaniment variation (VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1, CHORUS 2, SOLO) • Pad • Some FUNCTION parameters (pages 26 through 58) DETAIL CStop Playback SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP VPress [EXIT] When Done FUNCTION EXIT 6 If changes to any of the above parameters are recorded in the sequence, the recorded changes will still take effect even if you manually change the parameters while playing. Playback will stop automatically when the end of the sequence is reached. At this point the parameters recorded on the ACCOMP. track will revert to their initial values. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the [STOP] button. Press the [EXIT] key to exit the sequencer mode and return to the normal play mode. The sequencer mode can also be exited by pressing the [SEQUENCER] button. The Sequencer Sequence Editing RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f The PSR-5700 sequencer edit mode offers a range of functions that let you modify the recorded data and the way in which it is recorded in a number of ways. Press the [EDIT] button while the sequencer is engaged to enter the sequencer edit mode. When you’re finished editing press the [EDIT] button again or press the [EXIT] button to return to the sequencer. The various functions in the sequencer edit mode are accessed by using the [s] and [t] buttons (these are the same as the [ABC MODE] and [HARMONY TYPE] buttons, respectively), while the various display screens provided by each function are accessed by using the [<] and [>] buttons (the [TRANSPOSE/TUNE] and [OCTAVE CHANGE] buttons, respectively). A. B. C. MODE `CONDITION/REC TYPE ‡ Metro=On Harmony=Key – + – s < TRANSPOSE/ TUNE + > t OCTAVE CHANGE HARMONY TYPE The sequencer record and playback modes can not be engaged while in the edit mode. DETAIL The edit functions may not work if a large amount of sequence data has been recorded. DETAIL E1 CONDITION/REC TYPE Edit function 1 (“E1”) actually includes two separate functions: CONDITION and RECORD TYPE. ● Condition Notes: `CONDITION/REC TYPE ‡ Metro=On Harmony=Key – + – + Purpose: This display page allows the recording metronome sound to be turned on or off, and determines whether harmony will be applied to the keyboard or a track part. Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn the metronome on or off, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to select the harmony part — “Key” or “Tr1” through “Tr7”. The metronome sound only appears during recording when no rhythm is playing. When the “Key” harmony setting is selected (this is the default setting when the sequencer mode is engaged), harmony will be applied to notes played on the keyboard. If the “Tr1” harmony setting is selected, harmony will be applied to the track-1 part. If “Tr2” is selected harmony is applied to track 2, and so on. If Harmony is not turned on during recording, it will automatically be turned off each time playback is stopped if it is turned on before or during playback. Harmony can only be applied to tracks that contain data. 7 The Sequencer ● Recording Type to begin (In), and the punch-out measure at which recording is to end (Out). Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between these two display screens, and the associated [-] and [+] buttons to specify the required measure numbers. † `REC TYPE Mode=Replace – + † `REC TYPE Mode=Punch Purpose: – Selects the Replace, Overdub, or Punch record mode. + Play St= – ‡ 1 + Procedure: † `Punch IN/OUT MEAS. In= 1 Out= 1 Press the [>] button to access the REC TYPE display. Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the Replace, Overdub, or Punch record mode: • Replace If replace recording is selected, any previous data on the track being recorded will be erased and replaced by the new material. • Overdub If overdub recording is selected, previous material on that track will be retained and the new material will be added to it. • Punch Punch-in recording allows a specified measure or range of measures to be re-recorded (replaced) without affecting previously recorded material before and after the punch-in range. When the Punch mode is selected you must also specify the measure from which playback is to begin prior to the “punch-in” point at which recording will actually begin (Play St), the punch-in measure from which recording is E2 + – + Notes: It’s generally convenient to set the “Play St” measure in the Punch mode to just a few measures before the punch-in point. This allows you to get the feel of the music and prepare to start playing at the punch-in point. You can even play along with the material prior to the actual punch-in point so you’ll flow naturally into the punch-in recording range. A footswitch (the supplied FC5 footswitch can be used) plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SW jack can also be used to punch-in and punch-out when the footswitch “Punch In” function is selected via the “FOOT SWITCH SELECT” function described on page 37. With the sequencer running in the Punch Record mode, press the footswitch at the point you want to begin recording (i.e. to “punch in”), and again to stop recording (punch out). Please note that the punch-in record function can only be used on tracks that already contain recorded material. VOLUME Purpose: 7, from left to right), then use either the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the volume to a value between “00” (minimum volume — no sound) and “99” (maximum volume). Vertical bar-graphs to the right of each track number on the top line of the display provide a graphic representation of the track volume levels. This page lets you independently set the playback volume of each of the sequencer’s seven orchestra tracks. Notes: “VOL. 1~2'3~4'5~6'7~ _ 99/81/99/81/99/81/99 – + – + Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the volume parameter of the track you want to adjust (1 through 8 – Only tracks that contain data are available for volume control. Any recorded volume changes will override these settings. The Sequencer E3 TRACK COPY/MIX £TRACK COPY/MIX ‡ Source1=Tr1 Source2=Tr2 – + – + † £COPY/MIX Tr1+Tr2 Dest.=Tr1 Execute – + – + Purpose: Copies the data from one recorded track to another, or mixes the data from two recorded tracks (except the ACCOMP. track). ● Copy Source track 1 Data Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the first source track (Source1), the second source track (Source2), and the destination track (Dest.). If “CopyToDest.” is selected for the Source2 parameter, only the Source1 track is copied to the destination track. Once the source and destination tracks have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the mixdown operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the mixdown if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. Notes: Copy to Destination track Data ● Mix Source track 1 Data Source track 2 Data Destination track (mix result) The mix function is most useful when you want to record more than 7 individual parts on the seven orchestra-part tracks. Successfully recorded parts can be combined using this function, thus opening up more tracks for further recording. The data in the source tracks is not erased during a mix operation. If the tracks that are mixed use different voices, the voice of the lower-numbered track will be used. Subsequent recorded voice changes will operate normally. Please note that only tracks containing data can be specified as the source tracks. Any data in the destination track will be overwritten by data copied from the source 1 and 2 tracks. 9 The Sequencer E4 QUANTIZE ¢QUANTIZE Track=Tr1 – + † ¢QUANTIZE Size=1/32 – + 1/32 ‡ Execute – + Tr1 Execute – + Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the quantize operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. The Quantize Sizes are: 1/4 = 1/4 note 1/6 = 1/4 note triplet Purpose: 1/8 = 1/8 note Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified beat. 1/12 = 1/8 note triplet 1/24 = 1/16 note triplet e ee e 1/32 = 1/32 note ee e e After quantization e e e e e e e e Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left [-] and [+] buttons to set the track number (Track) and the quantize size (Size). Once the track number and quantize size have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the quantize operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. 10 1/16 = 1/16 note One measure of 8th notes before quantization 3 3 3 1/96 = maximum resolution (default) Notes: Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical feel. Always use a quantize value that is at least as “short” as the shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example, some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats, thus ruining the track. The Sequencer E5 DELETE ALL TRACKS DELETE ALL TRACKS TopMeas= 4 LastMeas= – † + – DELETE from ‡ 6 + 4 to 6 Execute + Once the top and last measure numbers have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the second display screen to actually execute the delete operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Notes: Purpose: Deletes the specified measure or range of measures from all tracks (including the accompaniment track). Delete Measures 4 through 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 9 Measure 4 through 6 deleted. 1 2 3 7 Subsequent measures moved back. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons in the first display screen to specify the number of the first measure in the range to be deleted (TopMeas) and the number of the last measure in the range to be deleted (LastMeas). It’s important to remember that a delete operation affects all tracks simultaneously, and that measures following the deleted range are moved back to take the place of the deleted measures. This differentiates the delete job from the erase job (described later), which replaces data in the specified range with rests. Be careful when deleting measures that contain effect on/ off events — e.g. pitch bend, modulation, sustain, harmony, etc. If, for example, you delete a measure that contains a pitch bend off event, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encountered. The delete operation has no “undo” function, so be absolutely sure you want to delete the selected material before actually executing the delete operation. 11 The Sequencer E6 INSERT ALL TRACKS Procedure: ⁄INSERT ALL TRACKS ‡ TopMeas= 6 Size= 3 – + – † ⁄INSERT from + 6size 3 Execute + Purpose: Inserts a specified number of blank measures in all tracks (including the accompaniment track) at the specified measure number. Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons in the first display screen to specify the number of the measure at which the blank measures are to be inserted (TopMeas) and the number of blank measures to be inserted (Size). Once the top measure number and size have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the second display screen to actually execute the insert operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Notes: Insert measure, size 3, at measure 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Measure 6 moved up; 3 blank measures inserted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Insert affects all tracks simultaneously. The specified number of blank measures is inserted before the existing data beginning at the specified insert measure number. The insert operation has no “undo” function. Result with new measure numbers. 1 E7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ERASE Procedure: ƒERASE Track=Tr1 – TopMeas= + – † ƒERASE Tr1 LastMeas= 6 – ‡ 4 + from 4 Execute + – + Purpose: Erases all note and event (pitch bend, volume changes, etc.) data from the specified measure or range of measures in the specified track (accompaniment track not available), leaving blank measures. TRACK 1 TRACK 1 Erase measures 4 through 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Measures 4 — 6 “blank, ” containing only rests. 12 8 8 9 9 Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the track number (Track), the number of the first measure in the range to be erased (TopMeas), and the number of the last measure in the range to be erased (LastMeas). Once the track and measure numbers have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the erase operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the erase operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. Notes: An erase operation leaves the specified measures intact but blank. The Sequencer E8 REMOVE EVENT ¥REMOVE EVENT ‡ Track=Tr1 Event=PB – + – + † ¥REMOV Tr1 PB TopMeas= 3 LastMeas= – + – † ¥REMOV Tr1 PB ‡ 4 + 3> 4 Execute – + Purpose: Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (pitch bend, modulation wheel, volume, or sustain operations) from the specified measure or range of measures in the specified track (accompaniment track not available). Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the track number (Track), the type of event to be removed (Event), the number of the first measure in the range from which the events are to be removed (TopMeas), and the number of the last measure in the range from which the events are to be removed (LastMeas). Once the track, event, and measure numbers have been specified, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the remove event operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the remove event operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. The Event Abbreviations are: PB = MOD = VOL = SUS = VC = Pitch Bend Modulation Wheel Volume Sustain Voice Change Notes: This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can remove only the offending pitch bends without erasing the entire track. Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a specified measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encountered. Similarly, if you remove all program change events from the beginning of a track, the voice that was initially selected when the track was recorded will be used. 13 The Sequencer E9 NOTE SHIFT »NOTE SHIFT ‡ Track=Tr1 Shift=+12 – + † »NOTE TopMeas= – † »NOTE – + Tr1 +12 ‡ 1 LastMeas= 16 + – Tr1 + 1> 16 +12 Execute – + Notes: Purpose: Shifts the pitch of notes in the specified measures of the specified track (accompaniment track not available) up or down by a maximum of two octaves, in semitone increments. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the track number (Track), the amount of note shift (Shift — see “Notes” below), the number of the first measure in the range in which the notes are to be shifted (TopMeas), and the number of the last measure in the range in which the notes are to be shifted (LastMeas). E10 Once the track, shift, and measure numbers have been specified, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the note shift operation. “Sequencer Executing!” will appear on the lower line of the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the note shift operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. The range of “Shift” values is from -24 to +24. A setting of “0” produces no note shift. Each increment represents a semitone, so a setting of +4, for example, would shift the pitch of notes in the specified range up by an interval of a third. A setting of -12 would shift the notes down by one octave. The ability to selectively shift the pitch of specified measures and tracks makes it simple to create “modulations” (key changes) without having to reprogram entire passages, and to create simple harmonies. SONG CLEAR Notes: `…SONG 1 CLEAR FREE:31k Execute + Purpose: Deletes the entire song — i.e. deletes all data from all sequencer tracks. Procedure: Press the [+] button below “Execute” on the display to execute the song clear operation. “Completed!” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. 14 Remember that this function deletes all data in the sequencer in one operation. If you think you might want to keep the data for later use or editing, be sure to save it to floppy disk (page 42, 46) before executing the song clear operation. Be careful with SONG CLEAR — it has no “undo” function! The remaining amount of sequencer memory is shown on the bottom line of the display in kilobytes. The Custom Accompaniment Programmer The PSR-5700 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT feature allows you to create and store up to six original accompaniments — including rhythm, bass, and chords — in addition to 36 internal preset accompaniment styles. You can even create intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that can be saved with your accompaniments. More custom accompaniments can be created and saved to floppy disk (page 42, 46). Your original accompaniments can be selected and played at any time, just like the presets. Basic Programming Procedure Although many of the steps outlined below do not have to be carried out in the order given, the basic programming procedure presented below will serve as useful guide to get you started. a Suitable AccompaniZ Select ment Style STYLE SELECT 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 BANK Begin by selecting one of the preset accompaniment styles that is close to the type of accompaniment you want to create. For example, select a WALTZ accompaniment style if you want to program a rhythm pattern in 3/4 time. NUMBER the Custom AccomX Engage paniment Programmer SEQUENCER SONG SELECT 1 2 3 4 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER an Accompaniment C Select Variation VERSE 1 VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO VProgram the Rhythm Part 5 Press the [CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER] button. The selected accompaniment style will begin playing, with accompaniment based on a C major chord. Also, the rhythm track will be set to the record mode (red REC indicator lit) and the 98 DRUM KIT voice will be selected. All other tracks containing data will be set to the PLAY mode (green PLAY indicator lit). PLAY tracks can be muted by pressing the corresponding track button (the green PLAY indicator will flash when the track is muted). Use the [VERSE1], [VERSE2], [CHORUS1], [CHORUS2], and [SOLO] buttons to select the accompaniment variation you want to program (variations cannot be selected when a custom style is selected). Intro, fill-in, and ending patterns will be based on the selected variation. If you delete all existing data to program an accompaniment from scratch, and change the time signature (beat), the intro, fill-in, and ending patterns cannot be used. Since the RHYTHM track is initially set to the REC mode and the 98 DRUM KIT voice is selected, you can start programming the RHYTHM track immediately. You can add new notes to the rhythm by playing the keys corresponding to the PSR-5700 drums and percussion instruments. The drums and percussion instruments produced are indicated by the symbols immediately above the keys (see the “KEYBOARD PERCUSSION KEYS” chart on page 14 of the “Getting Started” manual). Please note that pitch bend can not be applied to the rhythm instruments. 15 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer If you want to create a totally new rhythm track, press the RHYTHM track button while holding the [DELETE] button. This cancels all the instruments in the original rhythm track, leaving only a metronome sound (the metronome sound will not be heard while the rhythm is playing). The rhythm pattern can be up to 8 measures long (see “1. CUSTOM ACCOMP. Measure/Beat” on page 19), and the pattern will continue to repeat so you can add new instruments during each repeat, if necessary. PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f To Cancel A Single Percussion Instrument Although you can cancel all instruments in the RHYTHM track by pressing the RHYTHM track button while holding the [DELETE] button, it is also possible to cancel a single instrument to eradicate a mistake or simply eliminate an unwanted instrument. While holding the CANCEL key (the highest key on the PSR-5700 keyboard), press the percussion key corresponding to the instrument you want to cancel. The selected instrument should now be cleared from the pattern. > CANCEL If you can’t cancel an instrument even after following the above procedure, switch to VOICE SELECT number 8 or 9 and try again. HINT To Add Accents To accent specific beats after recording the rhythm, press the accent key (the second to highest key on the keyboard, with the “>” symbol) at the timing of beats you want to accent. Program the Bass and Chord B Parts PLAY REC 16 PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC After the RHYTHM track has been programmed (or it can be left as it is if no changes are required), you can select a bass or chord track for programming by pressing the BASS or a CHORD track button while holding the [RECORD] button (tracks containing preset data cannot be selected for recording). The RHYTHM track will automatically switch to the PLAY mode when a new REC track is specified. Please remember that only one track can be programmed at a time. PLAY REC PLAY REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Play notes or chords to be added to the existing data, or delete all data on the track (press the track button while holding the [DELETE] button) and start from scratch. The bass and chord tracks must be programmed in the key of C major! PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC PLAY REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM RECORD DELETE EDIT p r f Continue selecting new record tracks and variations, and program until your custom accompaniment is complete. Unwanted tracks can be deleted from the accompaniment by holding the [DELETE] button and pressing the appropriate track button. HINT HINT HINT Although the bass and chord tracks must be programmed in C major, they are automatically re-harmonized when the custom accompaniment is used in the play mode, and can be used in any key, major or minor. When programming an accompaniment from scratch, you can select a new voice that will take effect from the beginning of the accompaniment after deleting all tracks. Other voice changes added while programming will take effect from the point at which they are made. The synchro start, start, and stop functions can be used when recording a custom accompaniment. The re-start function, however, cannot be used. HINT HINT Work Area Full !! DETAIL Memory Area Full!! Can not Save Pitch bend, modulation, and sustain changes are not recorded if the accompaniment is stopped — the accompaniment must be running for parameter changes to be recorded. The Custom Accompaniment Programmer memory capacity is limited. When the available memory for the track you are recording is exhausted, the “Work Area Full !!” display will appear and further recording on that track will be impossible unless existing data is deleted. Further, if the data size is too big when you perform a save operation, “Memory Area Full!!/ Can not Save” will appear on the display. Only preset voices 00 through 89 can be used to record bass and chord parts (custom voices cannot be used). DETAIL NSet a New Default Tempo If necessary, set a new default tempo for the custom accompaniment by using the TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons. 17 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Give the Finished AccompaM niment a Name and Assign it to a CUSTOM Number Use the “4. NAME” function described on page 20 to give your custom accompaniment an original name, then use the “5. SAVE TO ACCOMP.” function described on page 20 to assign the accompaniment to a CUSTOM number and exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer mode. ¢NAME _ Big Band – + – + SAVE TO ACCOMP. Set to=Cus0 -Execute– + – SAVE Set to=Cus0 – + ßCancel´ No Yes + – IMPORTANT Please note that if you attempt to exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer by pressing the [EXIT], [SEQUENCER], or [CUSTOM ACCOMP PROGRAMMER] button, the confirmation display shown to the left will appear: + Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the custom accompaniment number to which the accompaniment is to be stored (C0 through C5), then press the [+] button under “YES” on the display to store the accompaniment. Press the [-] button under “NO” on the display to exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer without storing the data. You can also press both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously to cancel the store operation and return to the Custom Accompaniment Programmer if you want to make a few more changes or additions to the accompaniment before storing. Using a Custom Accompaniment STYLE SELECT 0 1 2 3 4 5 CUSTOM 0 1 2 3 4 5 DISK BANK NUMBER Once created and stored, your original accompaniment can be selected and used in the same way as the preset accompaniment styles. Press the [CUSTOM] button and then the appropriate STYLE SELECT NUMBER button (0 through 5) to select a custom accompaniment — C0, C1, C2, C3, C4, or C5. The selected custom accompaniment can then be operated just like any of the preset accompaniment styles — it can be started and stopped as usual, and can be used in the FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER AUTO BASS CHORD modes. To select a preset accompaniment style after selecting a custom accompaniment, use the STYLE SELECT buttons in the normal way. HINT Interactive Accompaniment cannot be used with custom accompaniments. IMPORTANT 18 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Custom Accompaniment Editing The PSR-5700 Custom Accompaniment Programmer offers a range of functions that let you modify the recorded data in a number of ways. The various Custom Accompaniment Programmer functions are accessed by using the [s] and [t] buttons, while the various display screens provided by each function are accessed by using the [<] and [>] buttons. 1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. (Measure/Beat) Procedure: `CUSTOM ACCOMP. Normal Measure:4 Beat:4 – + – + Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to specify the numbers of measures the accompaniment is to have (from 1 to 8), and the right [-] and [+] buttons to specify the number of beats per measure — from “3” to “5”. Purpose: Notes: This display page allows the length (in measures) and time signature of the accompaniment to be defined when the Custom Accompaniment mode is initially engaged. These parameters can only be changed when you’re creating an entirely new pattern from scratch — i.e. you have deleted all tracks from the original accompaniment by holding the [DELETE] button and pressing the buttons of all tracks containing data so that no PLAY indicators remain lit. The INTRO, FILL, and ENDING variations must also be empty. FILL patterns can have a maximum length of 1 measure. 2 VOLUME Procedure: “VOL. 1~2~3~4~5~6~B~R~ _ 15/15/15/15/15/15/15/15 – + – + Purpose: This page lets you independently set the volume of each of the Custom Accompaniment Programmer’s tracks. Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the volume parameter of the track you want to adjust (1 through 6, “B” for BASS, and “R” for RHYTHM, from left to right), then use either the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the volume to a value between “0” (minimum volume — no sound) and “15” (maximum volume). Vertical bar-graphs to the right of each track number on the top line of the display provide a graphic representation of the track volume levels. Notes: Only tracks that contain data are available for volume control. 19 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer 3 FADER SELECT Procedure: £FADER SELECT — C2` C3` C4“ C5“ C6“ C1` – + – + Purpose: Assigns the CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 volume controls to Custom Accompaniment Programmer CHORD tracks 1 through 6, determining which control affects which chord tracks when the accompaniment is played back. 4 Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the chord track you want to assign (C1 through C6), then use the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to assign either “1” (the CHORD 1 volume control) or “2” (the CHORD 2 volume control) to the selected chord track. Notes: It is a good idea to group the chord tracks according to their musical function. For example, tracks containing basic block chords could be assigned to the CHORD 1 control while tracks containing more “decorative” chord work could be assigned to the CHORD 2 control. NAME Procedure: ¢NAME _ Big Band – + – + Use the [<] and [>] buttons to move the underline cursor to the various character positions, then use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the required character for each position. Notes: Purpose: Allows a name of up to 8 characters to be assigned to the current custom accompaniment before it is stored via the following “5. SAVE TO ACCOMP.” function. Independent names can not be assigned to INTRO, FILL, and ENDING patterns. Here’s a list of the characters that can be selected via the left [-] and [+] buttons. Character list [Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_` abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥ 5 SAVE TO ACCOMP. Procedure: SAVE TO ACCOMP. Set to=Cus0 -Execute– + – + Purpose: This function stores the current custom accompaniment to a specified custom accompaniment number. 20 The “Set to” parameter in the first display screen determines to which custom accompaniment number the accompaniment will be stored — Cus0, Cus1, Cus2, Cus3, Cus4, or Cus5. When the “Set to” parameter has been set as required by using the left [-] and [+] buttons, press the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-Execute-” on the display to actually store the current custom accompaniment in the specified custom accompaniment number. “Completed” will appear when the operation is complete. The Custom Accompaniment Programmer 6 QUANTIZE The Quantize Sizes are: ⁄QUANTIZE Track=Rhythm – + 1/32 ‡ Execute – + 1/4 = 1/4 note 1/6 = 1/4 note triplet 1/8 = 1/8 note 1/12 = 1/8 note triplet †⁄QUANTIZE Size=1/32 – + Rhythm Execute – + 1/16 = 1/16 note 1/24 = 1/16 note triplet 1/32 = 1/32 note 3 3 3 Purpose: Notes: Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified beat. Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical feel. Always use a quantize value that is at least as “short” as the shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example, some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats, thus ruining the track. Quantization can not be applied to tracks containing preset data. If you attempt to quantize a track containing preset (including disk style) data, “!” will appear on the display in place of “=”. One measure of 8th notes before quantization e ee e ee e e After quantization e e e e e e e e Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left [-] and [+] buttons to set the track number (Track) and the quantize size (Size). Once the track number and quantize size have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the quantize operation. Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the quantize operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. 21 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer 7 COPY Procedure: ƒCOPY Track=Rhythm – ‡ TopMeas=1 + – + †ƒCOPY Rhythm 1LastMeas=2 Meas=5 – + †ƒCOPY – ‡ + Rhythm 1-2>5 Execute – + Purpose: Copies a specified measure or range of measures to a different location within the same track. Copy measures 1 through 2 to measure 5 in the same track. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 22 2 3 4 1 2 7 8 Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons in the various screens to specify the track number (Track), the number of the first measure of the range to be copied (TopMeas), the number of last measure of the range to be copied (LastMeas), and the number of the measure (Meas) to which the data is to be copied. Once the track numbers and measure numbers have been selected, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the third display screen to actually execute the copy operation. Immediately after execution “Undo” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the copy operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. Notes: A copy operation overwrites the data from the beginning of the specified destination measure with the data from the source measure(s). Previous data in the overwritten measures is therefore lost. The COPY function cannot be used with tracks containing preset data. The Custom Accompaniment Programmer 8 REMOVE EVENT ¥REMOVE EVENT ‡ Track=Rhythm Event:VOL – + †¥REMOVE – + Rhythm VOL Execute – + Purpose: Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (volume, sustain, pitch bend, or modulation wheel operations) from the specified track. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to set the track number (Track) and the type of event to be removed (Event). Once the track and event have been specified, press the [+] button below “Execute” on the right side of the display to actually execute the remove event operation. 9 Immediately after execution “UndoExecute” will appear above the right [-] button, and that button can be used to undo the remove event operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. The Event Abbreviations are: PB = MOD = VOL = SUS = Pitch Bend Modulation Wheel Volume Sustain Notes: This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can remove only the offending pitch bends without erasing the entire track. Only the VOL event type can be selected when the RHYTHM tracks is selected. Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a specified measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encountered. The REMOVE EVENT function cannot be used with tracks containing preset data. CHANGE PATTERN Procedure: »CHANGE PATTERN Pattern=I/F/E: Intro – + – + Purpose: Selects the Normal or Intro/Fill/Ending accompaniment pattern for editing. Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select either “Normal” if you want to edit the normal accompaniment pattern, or “I/F/E” if you want to edit the INTRO, FILL or ENDING pattern. If you select “I/F/E”, the next step is to use the right [-] and [+] buttons to select “Intro”, “Fill” or “Ending”. Once the desired pattern has been selected, go back to the preceding screens and create your custom accompaniment. 23 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ● CREATING INTRO, FILL-IN, & ENDING PATTERNS The custom accompaniment programmer allows you to create one set of intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that can be saved and later used with custom accompaniments Cus0 … 5 (see “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” in step 7 for more details). ■ EDITING A PRESET INTRO, FILL-IN, OR ENDING PATTERN 1. Select the preset style that your custom accompaniment is to be based on. 2. Go to the “5 SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen and save the accompaniment to a custom accompaniment number (Cus0 … 5). 7. At this point the “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen will appear. Shift to the second screen and use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to select “User” for the custom accompaniment numbers with which you want to use your original intro/fill/ending patterns. Shift back to the first screen and press the [+] button under “RETURN” on the display to return to the “5 SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen. When this is done any custom accompaniment data previously saved in the same location will be overwritten! SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING‡ Return IMPORTANT + 3. 4. Use the [CUSTOM] and [NUMBER] buttons to select the custom accompaniment you saved in the preceding step. – Go to the “9 CHANGE PATTERN” screen and use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select “I/F/E”, then use the right [-] and [+] buttons to select “Intro,” “FillIn,” or “Ending.” »CHANGE PATTERN Pattern=I/F/E: Intro – 5. 6. + – If you go to the “9 CHANGE PATTERN” screen and select a different “Pattern,” the screen you need to save the pattern you created in step 5 will appear automatically. Press the [+] button under “YES” on the display and the pattern will be saved. SAVE TO ACCOMP. Set to:I/F/E No + – Yes + + – + Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create other patterns. + When the pattern is complete, go to the “5 SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen and save the pattern. – 8. DETAIL After selecting the type of pattern to be programmed, go to any other custom edit screen and program the pattern using the standard custom accompaniment programming procedure. DETAIL 24 † SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING Style=Cus0 = User DETAIL DETAIL HINT If you select “Preset” in the “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen, then the un-edited intro, fill-in and ending patterns of the original preset style will be used with the selected custom style. If you select “NoAssign”, then no intro, fill-in, or ending patterns will be used. In this case the [INTRO] button functions in the same way as the [START] button, the [ENDING] button functions in the same way as the [STOP] button, and the [FILL IN] button has no effect. If the user patterns have a different time signature than the custom accompaniment patterns, then “User” cannot be selected in the “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen. The “SET INTRO/FILL/ENDING” screen appears automatically when an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern is saved, or when “I/F/E” is reset to “Normal” in the “9 CHANGE PATTERN” screen. To prevent differences between the time signatures of the intro, fill-in, and ending patterns, all the patterns for the selected styles are saved simultaneously when any one pattern is saved. For example, if you edit an intro pattern while a preset style is selected and then save the intro pattern, the fill-in and ending patterns for the selected style will also be saved. If you then edit and save the fill-in pattern, the intro and ending patterns will also be saved, meaning the intro pattern you just saved will be overwritten. To prevent this, first copy the preset style to a custom style number, as described in steps 1 through 3, above, and then use this as a basis for your new patterns. Of course, you must be careful that you don’t overwrite a previously saved custom accompaniment style when doing this. The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ■ EDITING A PREVIOUSLY SAVED USER INTRO, FILL-IN, OR ENDING PATTERN ■ CREATING A NEW INTRO, FILL-IN, OR ENDING PATTERN To edit intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that you have previously created and saved, simply select the custom accompaniment to which the user patterns are assigned (Cus0 … 5) and follow steps 4 through 8, above. After selecting an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern as described in step 4, above, use the [DELETE] button to delete all data from all tracks. Then follow steps 5 through 8 to create your original pattern. To create an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern with a different time signature, go to the “1 CUSTOM ACCOMP” screen and set the “BEAT” parameter as required. If you delete and save the intro pattern, the fill-in pattern, and the ending pattern, the “1 CUSTOM ACCOMP” screen will appear automatically no matter what pattern edit mode you’re in, and you can set the “BEAT” parameter as required. Use the synchro start function when you want to enter data precisely on the first beat of the first measure. HINT ● EXITING FROM THE CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT MODE To exit from the custom accompaniment mode, press either the [CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER] or [EXIT] button. This will return you to the normal play mode. If you have not performed a save operation via the “5 SAVE TO ACCOMP” screen after performing any other operation in the custom accompaniment mode, however, the following display will appear automatically when you exit from the custom accompaniment mode: SAVE Set to=Cus0 – + If you attempt to exit after programming an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern, the following display will appear: SAVE Set to:I/F/E ßCancel´ No Yes – + From this display you will exit to the “SET INTRO/FILL/ ENDING” display, from which you can exit as described above. ßCancel´ No Yes – + To save the edited data before exiting, use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the destination custom accompaniment number, and then press the [+] button below “YES” on the display. If you want to exit without saving, simply press the [-] button below “NO” on the display. You can return to the custom accompaniment mode by pressing both the right [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. DETAIL 25 Other Functions The PSR-5700 [FUNCTION] button selects 6 groups of functions that access single or multiple display “pages” of parameters. Here’s a list of the functions and the manual page numbers on which they are described in detail. [F1] [F2] [F3] Custom Voice Edit .......................... 27 Reverb Type ................................... 35 Effect Type ...................................... 36 Controller ........................................ 37 Key Velocity .................................... 37 [F4] [F5] [F6] Split Point ........................................ 40 Interactive Accompaniment............. 40 Super Style Play Mode ................... 41 Disk ................................................. 42 Utility ............................................... 49 MIDI ................................................ 50 General Function Selection & Editing Procedure FUNCTION EXIT F1: CUSTOM VOICE EDIT F2: REVERB / EFFECT F3: CONTROLLER / KEY VELOCITY F4: SPLIT POINT / I.A. / S.S.P.MODE F5: DISK F6: UTILITY / MIDI Each of the function groups selected by the [FUNCTION] button includes several display “pages.” These are accessed by using the [s] and [t] buttons. Furthermore, in some cases a display page have more parameters than fit in a single screen. The different screens are accessed by using the [<] and [>] buttons. Each display screen will have a maximum of two parameters, and these can be adjusted by using the [-] and [+] buttons immediately below each parameter. Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously will generally set the “normal” value for the selected parameter. The left and right arrows select other parameters within the same page (if available). A. B. C. MODE “COMMON PitBend=0 – + These buttons set the left parameter. ……Piano 1 ‡ TouchSens=0 – + These buttons set the right parameter*. s < TRANSPOSE/ TUNE > t HARMONY TYPE OCTAVE CHANGE The up and down arrows select different display “pages.” * Some functions have only one parameter which will be shown to the left of the display. In such cases the right [-] and [+] buttons will have no effect. ■ The [EXIT] Button The [EXIT] button can be used at any time to exit from a function and return to the normal play mode. FUNCTION EXIT 26 DETAIL “Not Available in SEQ!” may appear on the lower display line when a function button is pressed in the sequencer, custom accompaniment programmer, DOC, or GM mode (depending on the mode, “SEQ” in the display may be replaced by “CUS”, “DOC”, or “GM”). If this message appears, the selected function cannot be accessed or edited. [F1] Custom Voice Edit The Custom Voice Edit mode allows you to edit any of the PSR-5700 voices to create new sounds that ideally match your own music style. 100 custom voices — 00 through 99 — can be programmed, each based on the correspondingly-numbered preset voice. After selecting the voice you want to edit*, engage the Custom Voice Edit mode by pressing the [FUNCTION] button so that “F1” appears on the TEMPO display. Use the various editing functions described below to modify the sound to suit your needs. Then press the [EXIT] button when you’re finished editing to return to the normal play mode. Your custom voices can be selected and played by pressing the [CUSTOM VOICE] button and using the VOICE SELECT buttons in the normal way (the custom voice numbers are displayed in reversed letters). * You can also select a different voice while the Custom Voice Edit mode is engaged via the VOICE SELECT buttons. In this case the normal voice selection display will appear while the VOICE SELECT buttons are being used, and for a few seconds afterwards. The display will then revert to the previous Custom Voice Edit display page. Please note that some voices may suddenly shift to a different octave or change in level when played on the highest or lowest keys. There may also be slight tonal changes at one or more points on the keyboard. DETAIL The preset value can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. HINT Some settings may produce noise or no sound. DETAIL Standard Voice Edit Functions (Voices 00 through 89) The following functions are available when editing voices 00 through 89. Different groups of edit functions are provided for the PSR-5700 dual voices (90 through 97 — page 30) and drum voices (98 and 99 — page 33). For all parameters described here the preset value can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. DETAIL 1 NAME `NAME _ ……:Piano 1 – + Purpose: Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the voice. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the desired character location, then use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the desired character. A chart of the available characters is given below. Character list [Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_` abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥ Notes: It’s a good idea to give your voices names that make them easily identifiable. If you’ve created a new voice that is a variation on the standard piano voice, for example, you could call it something like “PianVar”. 27 [F1] Custom Voice Edit 2 COMMON COMMON includes two display screens covering a range of parameters that affect the entire voice. Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values. “COMMON PitBend=2 – + †“COMMON Oct=Normal – + ……Piano 1 ‡ TouchSens=2 – + ……Piano 1 Pan=L R – ● Octave (Oct) Shifts the pitch of the voice up one octave (1up) or down one octave (1down). A setting of “normal” produces the normal pitch for that voice. DETAIL + Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also cause sudden pitch changes. ● Pan ● Pitch Bend Range (PitBend) Sets the range of the pitch bend wheel to “0” (OFF), “1” (±1 semitone), “2” (±2 semitones), “3” (±3 semitones), or “Glis” (maximum 1-octave glissando in semitone steps). ● Touch Sensitivity (TouchSens) Sets the apparent position of the voice in the stereo sound field. The graphic display indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and right speakers. DETAIL When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan position of the selected voice is used. The center pan position can be recalled immediately by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. Allows the touch sensitivity of the keyboard to be set to three different levels, or turned off: “0” (OFF), “1”, “2” , or “3”. 3 MODULATION The two parameters provided in this screen are used to adjust the depth and speed of modulation produced by the PSR-5700 MODULATION/EFFECT wheel. Use the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values. £MODULATION ……Piano 1 Depth= 0 Speed= 0 – + – + ● Modulation Depth Decreases (-) or increases (+) the depth of modulation produced by the PSR-5700 MODULATION/EFFECT wheel relative to the original modulation depth of the selected voice. ● Modulation Speed Decreases (-) or increases (+) the speed of modulation produced by the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel relative to the original modulation speed of the selected voice. 28 Notes: The maximum range of the depth and speed is from -7 through 0 to +7, although this range is more limited with some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected voice has been reached. The default modulation depth and speed values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. Minus settings produce gentler or slower modulation, while plus settings produce deeper or faster modulation, respectively. Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons below a parameter immediately recalls the default value (“0”). Modulation is applied automatically to some voices, and in some cases operating the wheel causes modulation to be applied automatically. [F1] Custom Voice Edit 4 Att ack The attack, decay, sustain, and release parameters provided here let you shape the volume envelope of the voice. Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values. y ca De Level EG RATE R el Sus ea se tain Time Key Pressed ● Sustain Key Released ¢EG RATE ……Piano 1 ‡ Attack= 0! Decay= 0 – + – + †¢EG RATE ……Piano 1 Release= 0 Sustain= 0 – + – + ● Attack Sets the speed of attack — i.e. how fast the sound reaches maximum level after a key is pressed. “0” sets the normal attack for the selected voice, minus settings produce a slower attack, and plus settings produce a faster attack. ● Decay Sets the speed of decay portion of the envelope — i.e. how fast the sound decays from the maximum attack level to its normal level. “0” sets the normal decay for the selected voice, minus settings produce a slower decay, and plus settings produce a faster decay. Sets the speed of sustain decay — i.e. how fast the sound decays after a key is released when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is on or the sustain pedal is pressed. “0” sets the normal sustain for the selected voice, minus settings produce a longer sustain decay, and plus settings produce a faster sustain decay. Notes: The maximum range for all parameters is from -50 through 0 to +50, although this range is more limited with some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected voice has been reached. The default values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons below a parameter immediately recalls the default value (“0”). DETAIL Since PIANO 1 (00) and some other voices already have the fastest possible attack, no sound will be produced if the Decay parameter for such voices is set to “+50.” The Decay parameter will have no effect on some sustaintype voices which have no inherent decay. ● Release Sets the speed of release — i.e. how fast the sound decays after a key is released when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is off and the sustain pedal is not pressed. “0” sets the normal release for the selected voice, minus settings produce a slower release decay, and plus settings produce a faster release decay. With voices like 21 STRINGS, in which key velocity (keyboard dynamics) controls the speed of attack, attack speed changes in the same way even if the attack parameter is set to a minus value. Changing the EG rate parameter may have no effect on the sound with some voices. DETAIL 29 [F1] Custom Voice Edit 5 TONE The brilliance and resonance parameters provided here make it possible to vary the tone of the voice over a wide range. Use the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to set the required values. TONE Brilli= – ……Piano 1 0 Resonanc= 0! + – + ● Brilliance (Brilli) This parameter alters the cutoff frequency of the filter applied to the voice, thereby making the sound more or less brilliant. Minus settings reduce brilliance for a rounder, more mellow tone, while plus setting increase brilliance for a sharper tone. Notes: The maximum range of both parameters is from -50 through 0 to +50, although this range is more limited with some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected voice has been reached. The default values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. Pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons below a parameter immediately recalls the default value (“0”). ● Resonance (Resonanc) Plus settings increase the height of a resonant peak at the filter cutoff frequency, giving the voice greater presence and sometimes a more “nasal” tone. Minus settings reduce resonance for a “flatter” sound. Dual Voice Edit Functions (Voices 90 through 97) The following functions are available when editing voices 90 through 97. Different groups of edit functions are provided for the PSR-5700 normal voices (00 through 89 — page 27) and drum voices (98 and 99 — page 33). For all parameters described here the preset value can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. DETAIL 1 DUAL NAME `DUAL NAME _ »…:SpacePno – + Purpose: Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the custom dual voice. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the desired character location, then use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the desired character. A chart of the available characters is given below. 30 Character list [Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_` abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥ Notes: Give your dual voice names that identify both the voices used, if possible. If you’ve created a new dual voice that combines piano and organ, for example, you could call it something like “PianOrg”. [F1] Custom Voice Edit 2 DUAL VOICE “DUAL VOICE »…SpacePno 00:Piano 1 19:Voyager – + – + Procedure: Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to select the desired voices. Purpose: Notes: This function allows any two of the PSR-5700’s standard voices (numbers 00 through 89) to be assigned to the dual voice. Remember that you can only use voices 00 through 89 in a custom dual voice. If you increment past voice number 89, the next voice selected will be 00, and vice versa. The pitch bend range for DUAL VOICE is limited to ±1 whole tone. 3 DUAL OCTAVE £DUAL OCTAVE »…SpacePno A=1down B=Normal – + – + Purpose: Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be independently shifted up or down one octave. Notes: Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also cause sudden pitch changes. Previous OCTAVE settings for the normal voice will be ignored. Procedure: Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired octaves for voices A and B. A setting of “normal” produces the normal pitch for that voice. “1up” shifts the pitch up one octave, and “1down” shifts the pitch down one octave. 4 DUAL VOLUME ¢DUAL VOLUME »…SpacePno A=50! B=45 – + – + Purpose: Independently adjusts the volumes of the two voices used in the dual voice. Notes: The volume range is from “00” (no sound) to “50” (maximum volume). Use this function to set the optimum balance between the two voices. When the parameter is set to “00” or “50” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. Procedure: Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired volume levels for voices A and B. 31 [F1] Custom Voice Edit 5 DUAL PAN DUAL PAN A=L R »…SpacePno B=L R Procedure: Purpose: Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired pan positions for voices A and B. The graphic display indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and right speakers. Independently sets the pan positions of the two voices used in the dual voice. Notes: – + – + When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan position of the selected voice is used. The center pan position can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. 6 DUAL DETUNE Notes: ⁄DUAL DETUNE »…SpacePno A= 0 B=+ 2 – + – + Purpose: Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be detuned slightly to create a thicker sound. Procedure: Use the left and right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired detune for voices A and B. 32 The normal tune value is “0”. This can be tuned down to a maximum setting of -50 or up to a maximum setting of +50. Each increment equals approximately 0.78 cents (a cent is one hundredth of a semitone). The maximum amount of detune that can be set in either direction is therefore 39 cents — not quite a quarter tone. This function can be used by leaving one of the voices set at “0” and detuning the other until the desired effect is achieved. Another approach is to tune one voice down and the other up. The pitch bend range is always ±200 cents, regardless of the setting of this function. When the parameter is set to “-50” or “50” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. [F1] Custom Voice Edit Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voices 98 and 99) The following functions are available when editing voices 98 and 99. Different groups of edit functions are provided for the PSR-5700 normal voices (00 through 89 — page 27) and dual voices (90 and 97 — page 30). 1 PERC. NAME Character list [Space]!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_` abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}≤≥ `PERC. NAME _ »¥:Drum Kit – + Purpose: Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the custom drum voice. Procedure: Notes: Give your drum voice names that identify their character. If you’ve created a new drum voice intended for rock music, for example, you could call it something like “RockDrum”. Use the [<] and [>] buttons to position the cursor at the desired character location, then use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the desired character. A chart of the available characters is given below. 2 PERC. PITCH Procedure: “PERC. PITCH »¥Drum Kit Prc=Kick1 Pitch= 0 – + – + Purpose: Allows the pitch of each instrument in the drum voice to be individually tuned. Use left [-] and [+] buttons to select the instrument to be tuned, and then the right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired degree of tuning. Notes: The maximum tuning range is from -50 through 0 to +50, with “0” being the normal pitch for the instrument. Each increment equals approximately 6.25 cents (a cent is one hundredth of a semitone), for a total tuning range of about ±312 cents. 33 [F1] Custom Voice Edit 3 PERC. PAN £PERC. PAN Prc=Kick1 – + »¥Drum Kit Pan=L R – + Purpose: Allows the pan position of each instrument in the drum voice to be individually adjusted. Procedure: Use left [-] and [+] buttons to select the instrument to be panned, and then the right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired pan position. The graphic display indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and right speakers. 4 Use this function to create the required “stereo image” for your drum voice. View in the drum kit from the audience side, for example, the bass drum is normally in the center, the snare to its right, the tom-toms to the left, and so on. The center pan position can be instantly selected by pressing both the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. When the parameter is set to “-50” or “50” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. PERC. TONE ¢PERC. TONE »¥Drum Kit Prc=Kick1 Softnes= 0 – + – + Purpose: Allows the tone (softness) of each instrument in the drum voice to be individually adjusted. Procedure: Use left [-] and [+] buttons to select the instrument to be adjusted, and then the right [-] and [+] buttons to set the desired degree of softness. 34 Notes: Notes: The “softness” setting range is from 0 through -9, with “0” being the normal setting for the selected instrument. Lowering the softness setting lowers the cutoff frequency of the filter applied to the selected drum instrument, thereby creating a softer tone. Some voices may produce no sound if this parameter is set too low. When the parameter is set to “0” or “-9” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. [F2] Reverb, Effect The PSR-5700 has 23 reverb-based effects and 9 other effects that can be selected via the four pages accessed by this function. The selected reverb and effect types are applied to the sound when the [EFFECT] and [REVERB] buttons are used (see page 37 in the Getting Started manual). 1 REVERB TYPE The Reverb Effects are: `REVERB TYPE No. 1 Type=Reverb : Hall – + – + Purpose: Selects the reverb effect to be applied when the [REVERB] button is turned on (see page 37 of the “Getting Started” manual). Procedure: The right [-] and [+] buttons step through the reverb list effect by effect. For faster selection you can use the left [-] and [+] buttons to directly select the reverb categories — Reverb, Delay, etc. — and then use the right [-] and [+] buttons to select the desired reverb effect within that category. 2 1. Reverb : 2. Reverb : 3. Reverb : 4. Reverb : 5. Reverb : 6. Reverb : 7. Reverb : 8. Reverb : 9. Delay : 10. Delay : 11. Delay : 12. Delay : Hall Room Plate Church Club Stage Bathroom Metal Short Medium Long OneShot 13. TempoSync 14. TempoSync 15. Echo 16. Echo 17. Refl&Gate 18. Refl&Gate 19. Refl&Gate 20. Delay&Rev 21. Delay&Rev 22. Variation 23. Variation : : : : : : : : : : : Short Long Stereo PingPong Panned Early Gate Single DelayL/R Distort. Tunnel Notes: The “TempoSync” effects produce a delay that is synchronized to the currently selected tempo. “Variation : Distort” produces a distortion effect. Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do to your sound. REVERB DEPTH “REVERB DEPTH _ R' B˜ C2' C1' O2¶ O1~ – + – + Purpose: Independently sets the depth of the selected reverb effect for the rhythm, bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 sound. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to select the parameter for which reverb depth is to be adjusted (R = rhythm; B = bass; C1 = chord 1; C2 = chord 2; O1 = orchestra 1; O2 = orchestra 2), and use the [-] and [+] buttons to set the reverb depth for each parameter. Pressing the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously instantly recalls the default depth value. Notes: Reverb depth can be adjusted in 7 steps, represented by a vertical bar to the right of each parameter. The longer the bar, the greater the reverb depth. 35 [F2] Reverb, Effect 3 EFFECT TYPE The Effects are: £EFFECT TYPE No. 4 Type=Chorus : 1 – + – + Purpose: Selects the effect to be applied when the [EFFECT] button is turned on (see page 37 of the “Getting Started” manual). 1. Tremolo 2. Tremolo 3. Tremolo 4. Chorus 5. Chorus 6. Flange 7. Flange 8. Symphony 9. Symphony : : : : : : : : : 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 Procedure: The right [-] and [+] buttons step through the effect list effect by effect. For faster selection you can use the left [-] and [+] buttons to directly select the effect categories — Tremolo, Chorus, etc. — and then use the right [-] and [+] buttons to select the desired effect within that category. 4 Notes: Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do to your sound. EFFECT DEPTH ¢EFFECT DEPTH _ B˜ C2' C1' O2¶ O1~ – + – + Purpose: Independently sets the depth of the selected effect for the bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 sound. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to select the parameter for which effect depth is to be adjusted (B = bass; C1 = chord 1; C2 = chord 2; O1 = orchestra 1; O2 = orchestra 2), and use the [-] and [+] buttons to set the effect depth for each parameter. Pressing the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously instantly recalls the default depth value. Notes: Effect depth can be adjusted in 7 steps, represented by a vertical bar to the right of each parameter. The longer the bar, the greater the effect depth. 36 [F3] Controller & Key Velocity The [F3] function group includes six functions that affect how the PSR-5700 responds to control via the keyboard, a footswitch plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SW jack, an expression pedal plugged into the rear-panel EXP. PEDAL jack, the [SUSTAIN] button and SUSTAIN footswitch, the PITCH BEND/GLISSANDO wheel, and the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel. 1 KEY VELOCITY Notes: `KEY VELOCITY ON – + – + Purpose: Turns keyboard velocity response on or off. Procedure: Use the left or right [-] and [+] keys to turn keyboard velocity response ON or OFF. 2 This function should normally be turned ON so that you can create expressive dynamics by varying the velocity with which you play the keys (i.e. how hard you play the keys). Key velocity can be turned OFF when playing voices that normally don’t have velocity response (organ, for example), or to assist young children learning to play the keyboard who have not yet developed the finger strength and touch for playing dynamics. FOOT SWITCH SELECT “FOOT SWITCH SELECT Type=Glide – 1 + Purpose: Determines the function of a footswitch plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SW jack. Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select one of the following footswitch functions: • Glide ............ Lower orchestra 1 sound by a semitone while footswitch pressed. • Harmony ..... Harmony occurs only while footswitch pressed. • Effect ........... Same as panel [EFFECT] button. • Punch In/Out . Sets punch-in and punch-out points when sequencer record mode set to “Punch.” • Tension ....... Modifies dominant 7th chords in the accompaniment to produce a more consistent sound when playing in a minor key. Also automatically reharmonizes non-scale tones on chords other than the tonic and 7th. • Perc. 1 ......... Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from the 98 DRUM KIT voice (see “Notes”). • Perc. 2 ......... Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from the 99 POP DRUM KIT voice (see “Notes”). • Start/Stop ............. Same as panel [START] and [STOP] buttons. • Start/Re-Start ....... Same as panel [START/RE-START] button. • Intro1/Fill .............. Same as panel [INTRO.1/FILL IN] button. • Intro2/Fill .............. Same as panel [INTRO. 2/FILL IN] button. • Intro3/Ending/rit .. Same as panel [INTRO. 3/ENDING/rit.] button. • V.Regist. + ........... Recall next (increment) voice registration. • P.Regist. + ........... Recall next (increment) panel registration. • Tap Start .............. Same as PAD Tap Start function. Notes: When the “Perc. 1” or “Perc. 2” setting is selected a new parameter appears to the right of the screen. This allows you to select the drum or percussion instrument that will be played when the footswitch is pressed. To select an instrument either use the right [-] and [+] buttons, or press the corresponding key on the keyboard. The preset velocity value will be assigned if the [-] and [+] buttons are used, while the velocity at which the key is played will be assigned if the keyboard is used to select the drum/percussion instrument. “FOOT SWITCH SELECT Type=Perc.1 Prc=Kick1 – 6 + 37 [F3] Controller & Key Velocity 3 EXP. PEDAL SELECT £EXP. PEDAL SELECT ‡ Effect=OFF MastVol=ON – + – + †£EXP. PEDAL SELECT ‡ Orc1Vol=OFF Orc2Vol=OFF – + – + †£EXP. PEDAL SELECT ABCVol=OFF RhmVol=OFF – + – + Purpose: Determines which of the PSR-5700’s parts (orchestra, rhythm, etc.) an expression pedal plugged into the rear-panel EXP. PEDAL jack will control. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the three display screens. Use the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to turn expression control on or off: • Effect ......... Effect control (Same as MODULATION/EFFECT wheel. All other parameters automatically OFF). • MastVol ..... Master volume control. • Orch1Vol ... Orchestra 1 volume control. • Orch2Vol ... Orchestra 2 volume control. • ABCVol ..... ABC accompaniment volume control. • RhmVol ..... Rhythm volume control. Notes: Normally you’ll want to be able to apply expression control to the orchestra voices without affecting the accompaniment and rhythm sound, so “Orch1Vol” should be turned on while the remaining parameters are turned off. DETAIL When “MastVol”, “Orc1Vol”, “Orc2Vol”, “ABCVol” , or “RhmVol” is turned ON, “Effect” is automatically turned OFF. When “Orc1Vol”, “Orc2Vol”, “ABCVol” , or “RhmVol” is turned ON, “MastVol” and “Effect” are automatically turned OFF. DETAIL The “Effect” setting only applies when the panel [EFFECT] button is turned ON. DETAIL 4 SUSTAIN PART SELECT ¢SUSTAIN PART SELECT Orch1=ON Orch2=ON – + – + Purpose: Determines whether the PSR-5700 sustain effect is to be applied to the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both orchestra voices. 38 Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn sustain on or off for the orchestra 1 voice, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn sustain on or off for the orchestra 2 voice. Notes: The sustain effect is applied to the specified orchestra part(s) only when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is turned on or when the sustain pedal is pressed. [F3] Controller & Key Velocity 5 PITCH BEND SELECT Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn pitch wheel control on or off for the orchestra 1 voice, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn pitch wheel on or off for the orchestra 2 voice. PITCH BEND SELECT Orch1=ON Orch2=ON – + – + Purpose: Notes: Determines whether the PITCH BEND/GLISSANDO wheel will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both orchestra voices. If, for example, you’re using the split mode (ORCH. 2v1) with a bass voice on the left and a sax voice on the right, you’ll want pitch bend to apply only to the right-hand sax voice. In this case simply turn orchestra 1 pitch bend on and orchestra 2 pitch bend off. If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected, no pitch bend is applied to the ORCH. 2 voice. 6 WHEEL SELECT ⁄WHEEL SELECT Type=Modulation – ‡ + †⁄WHEEL SELECT Orch1=ON Orch2=OFF – + – + Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select either “Modulation” or “Effect” operation, then press the [>] button to move to the second display screen and use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn wheel control on or off for the orchestra 1 voice, and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn wheel control on or off for the orchestra 2 voice. Notes: Purpose: Determines whether the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel will control modulation or the selected effect (page 36), and whether it will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both orchestra voices. This function can be used to apply modulation or the selected effect to just one of the voices being played in the split mode (ORCH. 2v1) to emphasize that voice and provide greater contrast with the other voice. When “Effect” operation is selected, the wheel will function only when the panel [EFFECT] button is turned on. If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected, no modulation is applied to the ORCH. 2 voice. 39 [F4] Split Point, Interactive Accompaniment, & 1 SPLIT POINT Procedure: `SPLIT POINT Split=F›2/G2 – Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to set the split point. Another way to set the split point is to press the key that is to be the highest key in the left-hand range — when this is done the SPLIT POINT function is automatically exited. + Purpose: Sets the split point for the ORCH.2v1 and AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment modes. 2 Press the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously to recall the default split point setting (F#2/G2). INTERACTIVE ACCOMP. “INTERACTIVE ACCOMP. ‡ Mode=2 AutoSolo=ON – + – + †“INTERACTIVE ACCOMP. Sense=4 Part=>R – + – + Purpose: Selects one of two available Interactive Accompaniment modes, turns the AUTO SOLO function on or off, sets the sensitivity of the Interactive Accompaniment function, and determines the keyboard part on which Interactive Accompaniment will be based. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the two display screens. Use the left [-] and [+] buttons in the first screen to select Interactive Accompaniment mode 1 or 2, and use the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn the AUTO SOLO function on or off. Use the left [-] and [+] buttons in the second screen to set the desired Interactive Accompaniment sensitivity, and use the right [-] and [+] buttons to select the keyboard part on which Interactive Accompaniment is to be based. Notes: • Mode: When Interactive Accompaniment mode 1 is selected, accompaniment parts that may interfere with what is played on the keyboard are automatically lowered in 40 Notes: volume when the keyboard is being played. When Interactive Accompaniment mode 2 is selected, the above function is combined with automatic muting of interfering parts and automatic switching between VERSE 1 and VERSE 2 or between CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 in response to keyboard activity. The default Mode setting is “2”. • AutoSolo: When the AUTO SOLO function is turned ON, the solo accompaniment variations will automatically be activated if nothing is played on the keyboard for a few measures (the actual number of measures depends on the selected style). Further, the solo variations will automatically be de-activated at the end of the current phrase after keyboard performance is resumed. No automatic solo switching occurs when the AUTO SOLO function is turned off. The default AutoSolo setting is “on”. • Sense: The sensitivity range is from “1” to “8.” “8” is the highest sensitivity. In this case “sensitivity” refers to how much activity the Interactive Accompaniment system must detect in the specified section(s) of the keyboard before a change in the accompaniment occurs. The default Sense setting is “4”. • Part: When the “PART” parameter is set to “L+R”, the Interactive Accompaniment system responds to activity (i.e. anything you play) on the entire keyboard. When set the “>R” only activity on the right-hand section of the keyboard is detected, and when set to “L<” only activity on the left-hand section of the keyboard is detected. The default Part setting is “>R”. Super Style Play Mode 3 SUPER STYLE PLAY MODE Procedure: £SUPER STYLE PLAY MODE SectionChanging=ON – + – Use the left or right [-] and [+] buttons to turn Super Style Play “SectionChanging” on or off. + Notes: Purpose: Determines whether Super Style Play variation switching will occur at the same time as Accompaniment Verse-toChorus switching. Turning this function on can provide greater contrast between the chorus and verse variations when using the Accompaniment feature. The default setting is “ON”. DETAIL 41 [F5] Disk Although the [F5] DISK function accesses a range of important disk functions, the most commonly used disk functions — save to disk and load from disk — can also be directly accessed via the [TO DISK] and [FROM DISK] buttons, as described below. Please note that no other PSR-5700 functions will operate while a disk function is in progress. IMPORTANT Write Protect tab For any disk operation an appropriate floppy disk must first be properly inserted into the PSR-5700 disk drive. The PSR-5700 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks. Make sure the disk write protect tab is set to the “write enable” position if you intend to save any data to the disk, and insert the disk with the sliding disk cover facing the disk drive and the disk label facing upward. Before a new disk can be used to save data, it must be formatted using the “FORMAT DISK” function described on page 47. Write Protect OFF The [TO DISK] Button Press this button when you want to save the current contents of the PSR5700 memory (see list below) to floppy disk for later re-loading and use. The display shown to the left will appear: TO DISK TO DISK _ 00:N_FILE00 Size:---k NO YES DISK IN USE FROM DISK 42 TO DISK _ 01:N_FILE01 – + TO DISK _ 01:N_FILE01 – + Size:---k NO YES – + Size:---k NO YES – + With the cursor located under the file number parameter at the left of the lower display line (use the [>] button to move the cursor if necessary), use the left [-] and [+] buttons to specify a number for the file to be saved (00 — 99). If a file with the selected number already exists on the disk, the name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number (if no name has been assigned, “N_FILE” will appear), and the size of the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. New files have a “0” size. The cursor can be moved to the various character positions in the file name (8 characters maximum) and the name edited by selecting the appropriate characters for each position via the left [-] and [+] buttons. When the file number has been specified, press the right [+] button under “YES” on the display to execute the save operation (or press the [-] button under “NO” on the display to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk” will appear while the data is being saved, and the amount of remaining data to be saved will be displayed in arbitrary units on the upper display line. “Completed!” will appear when the data has been successfully saved. The data saved to disk is as follows: • Instrument setup (condition) data. • Disk style data. • Custom voice data. • Custom accompaniment data. • Voice registration data. • Panel registration data. • Super style play data. • Pad assignment data (Multi, Tempo, and Percussion assignments). • Sequencer song data. See page 48 for a list of error messages that may appear during disk save. Unformat Disk ! Format Disk? NO YES – + If you insert a disk that has not been formatted into the drive, the display shown to the left will appear when the [TO DISK] button is pressed: Press the [+] button under “YES” on the display to format the disk (see “5. FORMAT DISK” on page 47). IMPORTANT The PSR-5700 identifies and handles disk files by number rather than the file name. If you save to a file number that already contains data, the original data will be erased and replaced by the new data. 43 [F5] Disk The [FROM DISK] Button Press this button when you want to re-load a previously saved file from floppy disk. The data loaded is the same as that saved by the TO DISK operation described above. When the [FROM DISK] button is pressed the display shown to the left will appear: TO DISK FROM DISK _ 00:N_FILE00 Size: 35k NO YES DISK IN USE FROM DISK FROM DISK _ 01:N_FILE01 – + FROM DISK _ 01:N_FILE01 – + Size: 35k NO YES – + Size: 35k NO YES – + Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the file to load (00 — 99, file numbers that contain no data will not be displayed). The name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number, and the size of the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. When the file number has been specified, press the right [+] button under “YES” on the display to execute the load operation (or press the [-] button under “NO” on the display to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk” will appear while the data is being loaded, and the amount of remaining data to be loaded will be displayed in arbitrary units on the upper display line. “Completed!” will appear when the data has been successfully loaded. The [FROM DISK] button allows all data in a file to be loaded at once. To load individual data groups use the FROM DISK function described on page 45. See page 48 for a list of error messages that may appear during a disk load operation. 44 [F5] Disk The [F5] DISK Functions The [F5] DISK function accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of floppy disk data. If you select the [F5] when no disk is present in the drive, the “Not Found Disk!” error message will appear on the display. Not Found Disk ! 1 FROM DISK • First Screen Procedure: `FROM DISK Size: 35k‡ 00:N_FILE00 : AllData Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the file to load (00 — 99). The name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number, and the size of the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. The right [-] and [+] buttons can be used to select the type of data to be loaded, as shown in “Notes:” below. When the file and data type have been specified, press the [>] button to select the next display screen, and press the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultaneously to execute the load operation. “Don’t remove disk” will appear while the data is being loaded. “Completed!” will appear when the data has been successfully loaded. – + – + • Second Screen (When SEQUENCER selected) †`FROM DISK Size: 2k‡ Song=1 -> Song=1 – + – + (When optional disk “AllData” or “Disk Style” selected) †`FROM DISK 1-16Slow – Size: 29k‡ Notes: + The following data types can be selected for loading: • Second/Third Screen (When optional disk “AllData”, “Disk Style”, or “Sequencer” selected) †`FROM DISK Are you sure? - YES – + Purpose: Loads the specified file from a floppy disk inserted into the PSR-5700 disk drive. • AllData ........ All of the below. • SetUp .......... Instrument setup (condition) data. • DiskStyle ..... Disk style data. • Cus.Voice ... Custom voice data. • Cus.Style .... Custom accompaniment data. • V.Regist ...... Voice registration data. • P.Regist ...... Panel registration data. • SSP .............. Super style play data. • PadAssign .. Multi, Tempo, and Percussion pad assignment data. • Sequencer .. Sequencer song data. 45 [F5] Disk 2 TO DISK “TO DISK _ 00:N_FILE00 – + Size:---k - YES – + Purpose: Saves the data listed in “Notes:,” below, to a floppy disk inserted into the PSR-5700 disk drive. Procedure: With the underline cursor located under the file number parameter at the left of the lower display line (use the [>] button to move the cursor if necessary), use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the file to save (00 — 99). If a file with the selected number already exists on the disk, the name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number (if no name has been assigned, “N_FILE” will appear), and the size of the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. New files have a “0” size. The cursor can be moved to the various character positions (8 characters maximum) in the file name by using the [<] and [>] buttons, and the name can be edited by selecting the appropriate characters for each position via the left [-] and [+] buttons. When the file number has been specified, press the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultaneously to execute the save operation. “Don’t remove disk” will appear while the data is being saved. “Completed!” will appear when the data has been successfully saved. Notes: The following data are saved to disk when the save operation is executed: • Instrument setup (condition) data. • Disk style data. • Custom voice data. • Custom accompaniment data. • Voice registration data. • Panel registration data. • Super style play data. • Pad data. • Sequencer song data. All data is saved in one operation. Specific data types can not be saved individually. See page 48 for a list of error messages that may appear during disk save. IMPORTANT 3 RENAME FILE £RENAME FILE Size: 32k _ 00:N_FILE00 - YES – + – + Purpose: Allows the name of the file having the specified file number to be changed as required. Procedure: With the underline cursor located under the file number parameter at the left of the lower display line (use the [>] button to move the cursor if necessary), use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the file (00 — 99). The current name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number, and the size of the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. The cursor can be moved to the various character positions in the 46 The PSR-5700 identifies and handles disk files by number rather than the file name. If you save to a file number that already contains data, the original data will be erased and replaced by the new data. file name and the name edited by selecting the appropriate characters for each position via the left [-] and [+] buttons. When the new file name has been entered, press the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultaneously to register the new name. “Completed!” will appear when the new name has been successfully registered. Character List [Space]!#$%&'()0123456789@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^_{} Notes: This function lets you change the name of a file without having to re-load and then re-save the entire file with a new name. Since the PSR-5700 uses the file number rather than the file name to recognize and manage data files, a file saved with the same number as another file will overwrite that file even if it has a different name. [F5] Disk 4 DELETE FILE ¢DELETE FILE Size: 32k 00:N_FILE00 - YES – + – + Purpose: Deletes the specified file from the disk. Notes: Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the number of the file to be deleted (00 — 99). The name of the selected file will be displayed to the right of the number, and the size of the file in kilobytes (approximate) will be shown on the upper display line. 5 Files deleted from disk can not be restored (there is no “Undo” function), so be sure you’ve selected the right file number before actually executing the delete operation. FORMAT DISK FORMAT DISK Are you sure? - YES – + Purpose: Formats a floppy disk for use with the PSR-5700. Procedure: After inserting a new floppy disk into the disk drive, press the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultaneously to begin formatting. “Don’t remove disk” 6 When the file number has been specified, press the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-YES-” on the display simultaneously to delete the file. “Don’t remove disk” will appear on the display while the delete operation is in progress, the “Completed!” will appear when the file has been deleted. will appear while the disk is being formatted, and the number of remaining tracks to be formatted will be shown on the upper display line. “Completed!” will appear when the disk has been successfully formatted. Notes: The PSR-5700 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks. Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk, so be sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain important data! DISK FREE AREA ⁄DISK FREE AREA 90% (640k) Purpose: Displays the remaining data capacity of the loaded disk in percent and kilobytes. Notes: This is a display-only function with no editable parameters. 47 [F5] Disk ● Disk Error Messages If an error is encountered when a disk operation is executed, one of the following error messages may appear: “ Type Error or Unformat! ” The disk in the drive has not been formatted or the disk is the wrong type or has the wrong format. “ Not Found File! ” The disk does not contain any files saved by the user. “ Write Protect on ! ” The disk write protect tab is in the write disable position. “ Disk Error! ” A data error has occurred during a save, delete, or format operation. “ Disk Full! ” The floppy disk does not have enough remaining capacity to carry out the specified operation. “ Sample Data Disk! ” You have attempted to perform a save, rename, delete, format, or disk free area operation while the supplied data disk is in the drive. 48 “ Style Disk! ” You have attempted to perform a save, rename, delete, format, or disk free area operation while a style disk or other optional pre-recorded disk is in the drive. “ Not Found Disk! ” No disk in drive. “ Bad File Name! ” The file name is all spaces and cannot be recognized by the PSR-5700. “ Not Enough Memory! ” Not enough memory to load the specified sequencer file from disk. Some of the error displays automatically revert to the previous display after a few seconds, while others require that the [EXIT] button be pressed to exit from the error display. If a damaged disk is used the data countdown during FROM DISK or TO DISK operations may stop and the load or save operation may get “hung up.” In this case, eject the disk from the drive even though the DISK IN USE lamp may be on. Discard the damaged disk. [F6] Utility & MIDI The [F6] function accesses to utility functions and a versatile range of MIDI functions. MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. The PSR-5700 offers a range of MIDI functions that allow it to be used in even sophisticated MIDI systems. • Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. 1 MEMORY BACKUP Notes: `MEMORY BACK UP OFF – The data backed up (retained in memory even when the power is turned off) by the PSR-5700 are listed below. When memory backup is turned OFF, the initial factory settings are automatically recalled whenever the power is turned on. + Purpose: Turns memory backup on or off. Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to turn memory backup on or off. Data Backed Up When MEMORY BACKUP is ON • Sequencer Song Data • Custom Accompaniment Data • Custom Voice Data • Disk Style Data • Panel Registration Memory Data • Voice Registration Memory Data • Multi Pad Data • Tempo Change Data • Percussion Pad Data • Super Style Play Data • Voice Part Select • Orchestration • Orchestra 1 Voice • Orchestra 2 Voice • Orchestra 1 Octave • Orchestra 2 Octave • Harmony On/Off • Harmony Type • Style • ABC On/Off • ABC Mode • Manual Bass Voice • Transpose Data • Tune • IA On/Off • Accompaniment Variation • Multi Pad Select • Pad Synchro, Break, Repeat, On/Off • Left Hold On/Off • Key Velocity On/Off • Foot Switch Assign Data • Foot Switch Percussion • Expression Pedal Assign Data • Sustain On/Off • Sustain Part Select • Pitch Bend Select • Wheel On/Off • Wheel Type • Split Point • IA Mode • Auto Solo On/Off • IA Sensitivity • IA Part • Super Style Play Mode • Reverb On/Off • Reverb Type & Depth • Effect On/Off • Effect Type & Depth • Memory Backup On/Off • MIDI Transmit Ch • MIDI Receive Ch • MIDI Split Send Ch • MIDI Rhythm Receive Ch • MIDI Sequencer Ch • MIDI Multi Part Ch • MIDI Multi Part Volume • MIDI Multi Part Voice • MIDI Switch (Control Change, Pitch Bend, Program Change, System Exclusive) • MIDI Clock • MIDI Local On/Off • MIDI Transpose Add Note • MIDI Split Send On/Off, Enable * The above data will be retained in memory for about one week even if the power is not turned on. To retain the backed up data for longer periods, turn the power switch ON for a few minutes at least once a week. * The default setting for this parameter is “OFF”. Data Backed Up When MEMORY BACKUP is OFF • Sequencer Song Data • Custom Accompaniment Data • Custom Voice Data • Disk Style Data • Panel Registration Memory Data • Voice Registration Memory Data • Multi Pad Data • Tempo Change Data • Percussion Pad Data • Super Style Play Data 49 [F6] Utility & MIDI 2 RECALL INITIAL DATA Notes: “RECALL INITIAL DATA 1 Data=Alldata -Execute– + – Here’s a list of the data types that can be initialized by this function: + Purpose: Recalls the specified initial factory settings. Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select the type of factory preset data you want to recall (see “Notes” below), then press both the right [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. “Busy!” will appear while the initialization is taking place, and “Completed” will appear when the initialization is complete. LCD AllData ........ Pad .............. V.Regist ...... P.Regist ...... SSP ............. ABC&IA ....... HarmoType . CusVoice .... Effect ........... Reverb ........ Control ........ Split ............. Midi ............. Data Type All data. Pad data. Voice registration data. Panel registration data. Super style play data. Auto Bass Chord & Interactive Accompaniment data. Harmony type data. Custom voice data. Effect type, depth. Reverb type, depth. All controller settings (F3 function group). Split point. All MIDI data. The [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] Button The PSR-5700 is compatible with both Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection and General MIDI (GM) software. To use such software, press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button in order to switch the PSR-5700 tone generator system to the DOC/GM mode. When the DOC/GM mode is selected you can select and play the voices via the PSR-5700 itself, or control the voices from an external MIDI sequencer or music computer. Data transmitted from the PSR-5700 can also be used to control an external GM-mode tone generator. The PSR-5700 normal play mode is known as the REMOTE CONTROL mode. ● PLAYING DOC OR GENERAL MIDI SOFTWARE ON THE PSR-5700 The PSR-5700 can play optional Yamaha Disc Orchestra Collection software, and General MIDI mode software recorded by other equipment. When a disk of either type (3.5" 2DD disks only) is inserted into the PSR-5700 disk drive, the PSR-5700 automatically switches the internal tone generator system to allow playback of the software and performance on the keyboard (Getting Started, page 40). C DO 50 GM [F6] Utility & MIDI ● GENERAL MIDI DATA RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION MIDI OUT MIDI IN Music computer, sequencer, etc. • General MIDI data can be received via the MIDI IN connector and played by the PSR-5700. Tone generator, etc. MIDI IN MIDI OUT • General MIDI data transmitted via the PSR-5700 MIDI OUT connector can be used to control appropriate tone generators and other MIDI equipment. ❍ ABOUT GENERAL MIDI The existing MIDI protocol allows performance and other data to be transferred between different instruments, even if they are from different manufacturers. This means, for example, that sequence data that was originally created to control a tone generator from manufacturer A can also be used to control a different tone generator from manufacturer B. Since the voice allocation in different devices from different manufacturers is usually different, however, appropriate program change data must be transmitted to select the right voices. The General MIDI protocol was developed to minimize confusion and the need for re-programming when playing software created by one MIDI device on another. This has been achieved by defining a standard voice allocation in which the same or similar voices are accessed by the same program change numbers or MIDI channels. The current standard recognized by the International MIDI Association is known as “GM System Level 1.” The PSR-5700 voice allocation complies with the GM System Level 1 standard when it is switched to the DOC/GM mode. See the “GENERAL MIDI (GM) Voice List” on page 254 for details. 51 [F6] Utility & MIDI ■ THE REMOTE CONTROL MODE The PSR-5700’s normal mode of operation (i.e. when the DOC/GM mode is not selected) is known as the REMOTE CONTROL mode. In this mode key on/off, voice, sustain, volume, pitch bend, and other performance data is transmitted and received without modification directly via the MIDI OUT and MIDI IN connectors. The receive channel is determined by the MIDI channel setting parameter described on page 54. It is also possible to play the rhythm instrument voices via the rhythm channel (page 54). More complex control is available through the Multi Part Setting parameters (page 56), allowing up to 8 different voices to be controlled via different MIDI channels. It is possible, for example, to play a number of melody parts from an external MIDI control device to the accompaniment of the PSR-5700 ABC system. ■ THE DOC MODE In this mode the PSR-5700 can play Yamaha Disk Orchestra (DOC) software. MIDI data is also transmitted and received in accordance with Yamaha DOC specifications. For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 242, the “DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List” on page 253, and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 256. ● 3 Ways To Select the DOC Mode DISK ORCHESTRA PLAY Song=ALL Mode=L+R – + – + • Insert a DOC disk (the DOC mode is automatically selected). • Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button. • Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To DOC Mode” message from an external MIDI device. • PAD (Fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per REMOTE CONTROL mode, and cannot be changed in the DOC mode). • FOOT SW (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE). • EXP. PEDAL (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Exp. Pedal Select fixed at Orc1Vol). • FUNCTION buttons (Only MIDI settings — F2 and F6 — can be changed). • MIDI transmission/reception. * Both the BANK and NUMBER VOICE SELECT buttons can be used, but some numbers do not have assigned voices and cannot be selected (refer to the “DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List” on page 253). These voice numbers are skipped when the [-] and [+] buttons are used. ● Controls That Function In the DOC Mode • Keyboard. • Volume controls (Getting Started, page 41). • VOICE SELECT button.* • [+] and [-] buttons. • [s] and [t] page buttons (Move to the voice select screen). • [<] and [>] shift buttons (Move to the transpose, tune, and octave change screens. Octave change only applies to Orchestra 1). • START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function). • REVERB and EFFECT buttons. • TEMPO button (The recommended tempo can be selected by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously). • SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra 1). • PITCH BEND (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Pitch Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed at ±300 cents). • WHEEL (Modulation applies to Orchestra 1). • KEY VELOCITY (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Fixed at KEY VELOCITY = ON). 52 DETAIL Since octave offset is applied to some voices played via the keyboard in the DOC mode, the pitch of notes played via the keyboard may not match that of those played by the corresponding MIDI note numbers. If you select a function that is not available in the DOC mode, “Not Available in DOC!” will appear on the display. DETAIL ● 3 Ways to Exit From the DOC Mode • Remove the DOC disk. • Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] or [EXIT] button. • Receive any MIDI exclusive message that selects a different mode from an external MIDI device. [F6] Utility & MIDI ■ THE GENERAL MIDI (GM) MODE In this mode MIDI data is received and transmitted in accordance with the General MIDI Level 1 standard. For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 242, the “GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List” on page 254, and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 256. ● 3 Ways To Select the GENERAL MIDI Mode GENERAL MIDI Song=001 001:Piano1 – + – + • Insert a General MIDI disk (the GM mode is automatically selected). • Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button. • Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To GM Mode” message from an external MIDI device. When the General MIDI mode is selected, the parameters listed below are initialized as shown. As for the panel setup data, only the MIDI channel and the volume and expression settings for the rhythm channel are initialized. General MIDI Level 1 Mode Initial Settings Program Change# ........ Pitch Bend .................... Volume ......................... Pan ............................... Modulation .................... Expression .................... Hold (Sustain) ............... Pitch Bend Sense ......... Fine Tune ..................... Coarse Tune ................. RPN .............................. DETAIL 1 (Piano 1) ±0 (Center) 100 Voice Preset 0 (Off) 127 (Max.) 0 (Off) 02H/00H (2 semitones) 40H/00H ±0 40H/00H ±0 NULL Only GM data recorded on 3.5" 2DD IBM-format disks in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 can be played on the PSR5700 (up to track 17 with format 1). Also note that data that does not comply with GM Level 1 specifications may not be reproduced. * “IBM” is a registered trademark of International Business Machines. ● Controls That Function In the GENERAL MIDI Mode • Keyboard. • ORCH1 volume control (controls the volume of the notes played on the keyboard). • VOICE SELECT button (01 through 99 only. Use the [-] and [+] buttons for other voice numbers. Refer to the “GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List” on page 254). • [+] and [-] buttons. • [s] and [t] page buttons (Move to the volume control screen for all channels*). • [<] and [>] shift buttons (Move to the transpose, tune, and octave change screens. Octave change only applies to Orchestra 1. Tune not available). • START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function). • REVERB and EFFECT buttons (REVERB is automatically turned on when the GM mode is selected). • TEMPO button (The recommended tempo can be selected by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously). • SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra 1). • PITCH BEND (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Pitch Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed at ±200 cents). • WHEEL (Modulation applies to notes played on the keyboard). • KEY VELOCITY (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Fixed at KEY VELOCITY = ON). • PAD (Fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per REMOTE CONTROL mode, and cannot be changed in the GM mode). • FOOT SW (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE). • EXP. PEDAL (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Exp. Pedal Select fixed at Orc1Vol). • FUNCTION buttons (Only MIDI settings — F2 and F6 — can be changed). • MIDI transmission/reception. DETAIL Coarse tuning and fine tuning can be controlled by MIDI data reception only. Rhythm data can be received on channel 10 only. DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL See the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 256 for details on which rhythm voices are played by which note numbers. If you select a function that is not available in the GM mode, “Not Available in GM!” will appear on the display. 53 [F6] Utility & MIDI * The [s] and [t] page buttons can be used to access the volume control screen for all channels. GM 123456789R123456 _ † ‡ ~¶˘~§¶~~˘ ~ ˘~ – + – + Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to move the cursor to the channel for which the volume is to be adjusted, then use the right [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume. The longer the graphic bar on the display, the higher the volume. 3 The numbers across the top of the display above the bar graphs correspond to the MIDI channels. From left to right the channels are 1 through 9, “R” is channel 10 (the rhythm channel), and numbers 1 through 6 to the right of “R” correspond to channels 11 through 16. ● 3 Ways to Exit From the GENERAL MIDI Mode • Remove the General MIDI disk. • Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] or [EXIT] button. • Receive any MIDI exclusive message that selects a different mode from an external MIDI device. MIDI CHANNEL SETTING The contents of this page are different depending on whether the Remote Control mode or the DOC/GM mode is selected. ● Remote Control Mode Notes: The various channel settings are as follows: £MIDI CHANNEL SETTING ‡ Transmit= 1 Receive= 1 – + – + †£MIDI CHANNEL SETTING ‡ SplitTrn= 2 RhmRcv=16 – + – + †£MIDI CHANNEL SETTING Seq.Track=1 Trans.Ch= 3 – + – + Purpose: Sets the basic transmit, basic receive, split transmit, rhythm receive, and individual sequencer track transmit channels. Procedure: In the first display screen the left [-] and [+] buttons select the basic transmit channel (1 … 16) and the right [-] and [+] buttons select the basic receive channel (1 … 16, All). In the second display screen the left [-] and [+] buttons select the split (left-hand) transmit channel (1 … 16) and the right [-] and [+] buttons select the rhythm receive channel (1 … 16). In the third display screen the left [-] and [+] buttons select a sequencer track number (1 … 7) and the right [-] and [+] buttons select the transmit channel (1 … 16) for that track. 54 • Transmit This setting is the same in the Remote Control and DOC/GM modes. It determines the basic channel on which all PSR-5700 data will be transmitted. • Receive The receive channel setting is the same in the Remote Control and DOC/GM modes, except that in the DOC/GM mode only MIDI system exclusive messages will be received. The receive channel is the basic channel on which the PSR-5700 will receive all MIDI data. If set to “All,” data can be received via all 16 MIDI channels. • SplitTrn The split transmit channel functions only in the Remote Control mode. This is the channel on which left-hand performance data (i.e. data produced by playing keys to the left of the split point) will be transmitted. Right-hand performance data is transmitted on the basic transmit channel specified in the first display screen. • RhmRcv This setting is the same in the Remote Control and DOC/GM modes. It specifies an independent MIDI channel via which the PSR-5700’s rhythm (drums and percussion) can be controlled. This means you can, for example, play the selected voice via the basic receive channel while simultaneously playing the rhythm instruments via a different channel (i.e. the RhmRcv channel). [F6] Utility & MIDI • Seq.Track/Trans.Ch This setting only applies when the Remote Control Mode is selected. Separate transmit channels can be set for sequencer tracks 1 through 7 (the ACCOMP. track does not transmit) so the PSR-5700 sequencer can be used to drive an external multi-timbre tone generator or multiple tone generators via the specified channels. DETAIL DETAIL If basic, split, and or sequencer track transmit channels are set to the same MIDI channel number, an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the channel number. If the basic and split transmit channels are set to the same number, the data from both the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard will be transmitted on the basic transmit channel (the content of the data to be transmitted can be set via the “SPLIT SEND PART” function described on page 57). Further, if several sequencer tracks are set to transmit on the same channel, the data from all those tracks will be transmitted on the same channel. As with the transmit channels described above, if the basic, rhythm, and or multi part (page 56) transmit channels are set to the same MIDI channel number, an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the channel number. In this case the received data will apply to all voices accessed by that channel number. If, for example, the basic, rhythm, and multi part receive channel are all set to the same number, any note data received on that channel will play the orchestra 1, rhythm, and multi part voices simultaneously. If the basic receive channel is set to “All,” a multi part receive channel cannot be assigned. DETAIL ● DOC/GM Mode £DOC/GM SETTING ‡ KeyboardCh= 1 Local=ON – + – The “Local” parameter determines whether the PSR-5700 is controlled by its own keyboard or MIDI data received from an external MIDI device. When local control is on, the PSR-5700 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the PSR-5700 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external sequencer or MIDI computer, for example, plays the PSR-5700’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-5700 keyboard. When Local is “ON” voice and controller parameters that can be played via the keyboard are set to the same channel as the transmit channel. • TransposeAddNote When this parameter is turned “OFF,” the PSR-5700 transpose settings are not applied to transmitted MIDI data. When turned “ON,” the PSR-5700 transpose settings apply to transmitted MIDI data in the same they do to notes played on the PSR-5700 itself. As for received MIDI data, when this parameter is “ON” the note data is not transposed, and when set to “OFF” the note data is transposed. Use the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn this parameter ON or OFF. + †£DOC/GM SETTING TransposeAddNote=ON – Notes: DETAIL + In addition to accepting MIDI note data on 16 channels (also during disk playback), the PSR-5700 has a separate keyboard note channel. Data on this channel can only be controlled via the PSR-5700 panel controls (when “Local” is “ON”), and is not affected by MIDI data. This data is transmitted via MIDI OUT, on the “KeyboardCh”. Purpose: Sets the transmit channel and turns local control on or off for the DOC/GM mode. Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons set the transmit channel (1 … 16) and the right [-] and [+] buttons to turn local control on or off. The “TransposeAddNote” parameter is available in the second screen. 55 [F6] Utility & MIDI 4 MULTI PART SETTING (Remote Control Mode Only) Procedure: ¢MULTI PART SETTING Part=1 Channel= 3 – + – ‡ + †¢MULTI PART:1 Volume=99 00:Piano 1 – + – + In the first display screen use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select a part number (1 … 8) and the right [-] and [+] buttons select the receive channel (1 … 16, Off) for that part. In the second display screen the right [-] and [+] buttons select the voice for the currently selected part number in the second display screen, while the left [-] and [+] buttons set the volume of the voice. Notes: Purpose: Allows the receive channel, volume, and voice to be independently specified for 8 separate “parts” to be controlled from an external MIDI device. DETAIL In the DOC mode MIDI reception occurs via channels 1 through 10, and channel 15 (rhythm part). In the GM mode, reception occurs on all channels regardless of these settings. Note that parts that are not required can be turned “OFF” via the “Channel” parameter in the first display screen. If the channel number of any part is set to the same channel number as a lower-numbered part, the “!OFF” display will appear and that part will be turned off. Any of the preset or custom voices can be specified via the voice parameter in the second display screen. DETAIL 5 MIDI SWITCH (Remote Control Mode Only) MIDI SWITCH ‡ CtrlChg=ON ProgChg=ON – + – + † MIDI SWITCH PitBnd=ON Exclusive=ON – + – + Purpose: Allows reception and transmission of control change, program change, pitch bend, and system exclusive data to be independently turned on or off. 56 If the basic receive channel is set to “All,” reception is disabled on all multi part channels, and “!OFF” appears in place of the multi part channel numbers. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between display screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to turn reception/transmission of the corresponding MIDI data on or off. Notes: These “switches” can be used to determine how the PSR5700 responds to MIDI data received from external equipment. If, for example, you don’t want the PSR-5700 voices to be changed by program change messages received from an external device, turn the program change switch “OFF.” The same applies to transmission from the PSR-5700 — turn off data that you don’t want to be transmitted to external equipment. In the DOC/GM mode, all control change data are transmitted and received regardless of the settings on this page. [F6] Utility & MIDI 6 MIDI SYSTEM (Remote Control Mode Only) ⁄MIDI SYSTEM Clock=INT Local=ON – + – + †⁄MIDI SYSTEM TransposeAddNote=ON – ‡ ‡ + †⁄MIDI SYSTEM SplitSnd=ON Out=L&R – + – + Purpose: These three display screens provide access to a number of important MIDI system “switches” — internal or external clock synchronization, local control on/off, transpose data transmission on/off, and split mode data transmission on/off. Procedure: Use the [<] and [>] buttons to switch between display screens, and the [-] and [+] buttons below each parameter to select the desired state for each parameter. Notes: The various system parameters operate as follows: • Clock The “INT” (internal) clock setting is the normal setting when the PSR-5700 is being used alone. If you are using the PSR-5700 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-5700 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXT” (external). In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the PSR-5700 MIDI IN connector, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal. • Local “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-5700 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control ON” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the PSR-5700 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external sequencer or MIDI computer, for example, plays the PSR5700’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-5700 keyboard. Local control cannot be turned ON or OFF during sequencer recording. DETAIL • TransposeAddNote When this parameter is turned “OFF”, the transmitted MIDI note data will not be affected by the PSR-5700 transpose setting. When “ON,” the transmitted notes will be transposed in accordance with the PSR-5700 transpose setting. The reverse is true for reception: when “ON” received note data is not transposed; when “OFF” received note data is transposed. • SplitSnd/Out When the SplitSnd (split send) parameter is turned “ON,” the setting of the “Out” parameter determines whether MIDI note data from the left-hand (“Left”), righthand (“Right”), or both sections of the keyboard (“L&R”) are transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. You could choose to transmit only the right-hand data so that only notes played on the right-hand section of the keyboard are reproduced via an external tone generator, for example. When turned “OFF” data from the entire keyboard is transmitted on the basic transmit channel. 57 [F6] Utility & MIDI 7 DATA TRANSMIT (Remote Control Mode Only) ¥MEMORY DATA TRANSMIT Data=Panel -Execute– + – ¥DATA TRANSMIT PRegist 0%~~~~~~~ + 100% ● MIDI Bulk Dump Reception (Memory Data Receive) The PSR-5700 can receive bulk data transmitted by a second PSR-5700 as long as it is not accessing disk data, the Custom Accompaniment Programmer is not engaged, and the DOC/General MIDI Level 1 mode is not selected. When a bulk dump is received the following display will appear: Purpose: BULK DUMP DATA RECEIVE PRegist 0%~~~~~~~ 100% Transmits the specified PSR-5700 panel or memory data via the MIDI OUT connector. Procedure: Use the left [-] and [+] buttons to select “Panel” or “Memory” data (see “Notes” below), then press both the right [-] and [+] buttons under “-Execute-” on the display simultaneously to begin data transmission. A bar graph shows the progress of the transmit operation, and “Completed!” will appear on the screen when the transmission is finished. The bar graph roughly indicates the progress of the bulk dump receive operation. “Completed!” will appear on the display when the data has been successfully received. ● Receiving MIDI Bulk Dump Request Messages BULK DUMP DATA SEND PRegist 0%~~~~~~~ 100% Notes: When “Panel” is selected all PSR-5700 panel settings are transmitted. When “Memory” is selected the following data types are transmitted: LCD When the REMOTE CONTROL mode is selected and the PSR-5700 receives a MIDI bulk dump request message from an external device, The display shown above appears and a bulk data transmission is performed. Progress of the transmission is shown in bar-graph form on the display. Data Type SetUp ........ Panel data. VRegist ..... Voice registration data. PRegist ..... Panel registration data. SSP ........... Super style play data. PadData .... Multi, tempo, and percussion pad data. CusVoic .... Custom voice data. CusStyl ..... Custom style data. Sequenc .... Sequencer data. The selected data is transmitted as a MIDI bulk dump that can be automatically received by a second PSR-5700 or other compatible MIDI device. ● Bulk Dump Error Messages If an error is encountered during bulk reception, a “CHECK SUM DATA ERROR !”, “END OF EXCLUS ERROR !”, or “HEADER DATA ERROR!” error message will appear for a few seconds and the receive operation will be terminated. In the case of a “CHECK SUM DATA ERROR !” or “END OF EXCLUS ERROR !”, the data will be replaced up until the point at which the error occurred. Data being received at the time the error occurred will be initialized. All other data is not affected. In the case of a “HEADER DATA ERROR!”, all data will be left unaltered. DETAIL 58 Broken cables and other causes of data errors cause a “BULK ERROR!” message. Index This index covers both the PSR-5700 “Getting Started” and “Advanced Features” manuals, so the page numbers include coded prefixes to indicate in which manual the information can be found: GS = Getting Started AF = Advanced Features A A tempo ...................................................................... GS-35 Delete all tracks .......................................................... AF-11 ABC ............................................................................ GS-18 Delete file ................................................................... AF-47 Accelerando ............................................................... GS-34 Demo .......................................................................... GS-10 Accents ....................................................................... AF-16 Disk ............................................................................ AF-42 Accompaniment .......................................................... GS-18 Disk error messages .................................................. AF-48 Accompaniment name .......................................... AF-18, 20 Disk free area ............................................................. AF-47 Accompaniment style ................................................. AF-15 Disk functions ............................................................. AF-45 Accompaniment variation ........................................... AF-15 Disk orchestra mode voice list .................................. AF-253 Attack ......................................................................... AF-29 Disk orchestra/general MIDI button ............................ AF-50 Auto solo .................................................................... GS-24 Disk style .................................................................... GS-25 DOC disk playback ..................................................... GS-40 B DOC mode ................................................................. AF-52 Bank buttons ........................................................ GS-13, 20 DOC/GM mode ........................................................... AF-50 Bass & chord parts ..................................................... AF-16 Drum kits .................................................................... GS-14 Beat display ................................................................ GS-21 Drum voice edit .......................................................... AF-33 Brilliance ..................................................................... AF-30 Dual detune ................................................................ AF-32 Dual mode .................................................................. GS-12 C Dual name .................................................................. AF-30 Dual octave ................................................................ AF-31 Change pattern ........................................................... AF-23 Dual pan ..................................................................... AF-32 Chord pads ................................................................. GS-30 Dual voice ................................................................... AF-31 Chorus ........................................................................ GS-22 Dual voice edit ............................................................ AF-30 Cleaning ....................................................................... GS-4 Dual volume ............................................................... AF-31 Clock .......................................................................... AF-57 Common ..................................................................... AF-28 Condition/rec type ........................................................ AF-7 E Controller .................................................................... AF-37 Editing procedure ....................................................... AF-26 Copy ........................................................................... AF-22 Effect depth ................................................................ AF-36 Custom accompaniment edit ...................................... AF-19 Effect type .................................................................. AF-36 Custom accompaniment programmer ........................ AF-15 Effect wheel ................................................................ GS-37 Custom number .......................................................... AF-18 EG rate ....................................................................... AF-29 Custom voice edit ....................................................... AF-27 Electrical interference ................................................... GS-5 Custom voice name .................................................... AF-27 Erase .......................................................................... AF-12 Event abbreviations .................................................... AF-13 D Exit button .................................................................. AF-26 Data backup ................................................................. GS-5 Data transmit .............................................................. AF-58 Decay ......................................................................... AF-29 Exp. pedal select ........................................................ AF-38 Expression & effects ................................................... GS-36 Expression pedal jack .................................................. GS-9 59 Index F Fader select ................................................................ AF-20 M Manual bass ............................................................... GS-19 Faster ......................................................................... GS-35 Manuals, about the ....................................................... GS-3 Fill-ins ......................................................................... GS-23 Measure/beat ............................................................. AF-19 Fingered chords ......................................................... GS-18 Memory backup .......................................................... AF-49 Fingering chart ......................................................... GS-178 Metronome ................................................................... AF-7 Floppy disks ........................................................... GS-5, 25 MIDI ............................................................................ AF-49 Foot switch select ....................................................... AF-37 MIDI bulk dump .......................................................... AF-58 Footswitch jack ............................................................. GS-8 MIDI channel setting ................................................... AF-54 Format disk ................................................................. AF-47 MIDI connectors ........................................................... GS-9 From disk .................................................................... AF-45 MIDI function tree ..................................................... AF-242 From disk button ......................................................... AF-44 MIDI switch ................................................................. AF-56 MIDI system ............................................................... AF-57 G H Modulation .................................................................. GS-37 General function selection .......................................... AF-26 Modulation depth ........................................................ AF-28 General MIDI .............................................................. AF-51 Modulation speed ....................................................... AF-28 General MIDI mode .................................................... AF-53 Multi pad mode ........................................................... GS-28 General MIDI mode voice list ................................... AF-254 Multi pad repeat playback .......................................... GS-31 Glissando ................................................................... GS-37 Multi part setting ......................................................... AF-56 GM/DOC mode percussion map .............................. AF-256 Music stand .................................................................. GS-9 N Handling & transport ..................................................... GS-4 Note shift .................................................................... AF-14 Harmony ........................................................... GS-36, AF-7 Number buttons .................................................... GS-13, 20 Headphones ................................................................. GS-8 Hertz ........................................................................... GS-15 I O Octave ........................................................................ AF-28 Octave change ........................................................... GS-16 Icons ............................................................................. GS-3 Orchestra 1 and 2 ....................................................... GS-13 Initialization ................................................................. GS-11 Orchestration .............................................................. GS-12 Input jacks .................................................................... GS-8 Output jacks ................................................................. GS-8 Insert all tracks ........................................................... AF-12 Overdub recording ........................................................ AF-8 Interactive accompaniment ............................ GS-24, AF-40 Intro, fill-in, ending patterns ........................................ AF-24 Introduction ................................................................. GS-21 P Pads ........................................................................... GS-28 Pan ............................................................................. AF-28 K Panel registration ....................................................... GS-38 Key velocity ................................................................ AF-37 Perc break function .................................................... GS-33 Keyboard percussion .................................................. GS-14 Perc pad mode ........................................................... GS-32 Perc. name ................................................................. AF-33 L Perc. pan .................................................................... AF-34 Left hold ...................................................................... GS-36 Left-hand keyboard section ........................................ GS-22 Location ........................................................................ GS-4 60 Perc. pitch .................................................................. AF-33 Perc. tone ................................................................... AF-34 Index Percussion instrument cancel .................................... AF-16 Style list ...................................................................... GS-20 Percussion map ........................................................ AF-255 Super style play .......................................................... GS-26 Phrase pads ............................................................... GS-28 Super style play mode ................................................ AF-41 Pitch bend .................................................................. GS-37 Sustain ........................................................... AF-29, GS-36 Pitch bend range ........................................................ AF-28 Sustain jack .................................................................. GS-9 Pitch bend select ........................................................ AF-39 Sustain part select ...................................................... AF-38 Power supply ................................................................ GS-4 Synchronized start ...................................................... GS-21 Punch recording ........................................................... AF-8 Q T Quantize ............................................................... AF-10, 21 Tap start ..................................................................... GS-34 Tempo ........................................................................ GS-20 Tempo change ........................................................... GS-34 R Tempo I ...................................................................... GS-34 Recall initial data ........................................................ AF-50 Tempo pad mode ....................................................... GS-34 Record track selection .................................................. AF-4 Tempo synchro function ............................................. GS-35 Recordable parameters (sequencer) ............................ AF-4 To disk ........................................................................ AF-46 Recording type ............................................................. AF-8 To disk button ............................................................. AF-42 Release ...................................................................... AF-29 Tone ........................................................................... AF-30 Remote control mode ................................................. AF-52 Touch sensitivity ......................................................... AF-28 Remove event ...................................................... AF-13, 23 Track copy/mix ............................................................. AF-9 Rename file ................................................................ AF-46 Track delete .................................................................. AF-5 Replace recording ........................................................ AF-8 Transposition .............................................................. GS-15 Resonance ................................................................. AF-30 Tuning ........................................................................ GS-15 Reverb ........................................................................ GS-37 Reverb depth .............................................................. AF-35 Reverb type ................................................................ AF-35 U Utility ........................................................................... AF-49 Rhythm accompaniment ............................................. GS-23 Rhythm part ................................................................ AF-15 Ritardando ............................................................ GS-23, 35 V Variations ................................................................... GS-22 Verse .......................................................................... GS-22 S Voice list ..................................................................... GS-12 Save to accomp. ......................................................... AF-20 Voice registration ........................................................ GS-17 Sequence editing .......................................................... AF-7 Voice select buttons ................................................... GS-13 Sequencer playback ..................................................... AF-6 Voices, selecting ........................................................ GS-11 Sequencer record ......................................................... AF-3 Volume ................................................................... AF-8, 19 Single-finger chords ................................................... GS-19 Volume settings .................................................... GS-11, 13 Slower ........................................................................ GS-35 Solo ............................................................................ GS-22 Song clear .................................................................. AF-14 W Wheel select ............................................................... AF-39 Song number ................................................................ AF-3 Split mode .................................................................. GS-12 Split point .................................................................... AF-40 61 MIDI Function Tree • MIDI-Funktionsübersicht • Arbre des fonctions MIDI • Arbol * Values with an “H” suffix are hexadecimal. * Bei Werten mit dem Suffix “H” handelt es sich um Hexadezimalwerte. * Les valeurs précédées du suffixe “H” sont des valeurs hexadécimales. * Los valores con un sufijo “H” son hexadecimales. I. Remote Control Mode <Reception Conditions> BRch:Basic Receive Channel PRch:Multi Part Receive Channel RRch:Rhythm Receive Channel MIDI FEH FAH FCH F8H ACTIVE SENSING START STOP TIMING CLOCK 8nH 9nH NOTE OFF NOTE ON/OFF <RRch> 8nH 9nH NOTE OFF NOTE ON/OFF <BRch/PRch/RRch> BnH,07H BnH,0BH BnH,01H BnH,0AH BnH,40H BnH,50H VOLUME EXPRESSION MODULATION WHEEL PAN SUSTAIN FOOT CONTROLLER BnH,7AH BnH,7CH BnH,7DH BnH,7BH LOCAL CONTROL OMNI MODE OFF OMNI MODE ON ALL NOTE OFF <BRch/PRch> BnH,00H 20H CnH,00H~63H BANK SELECT MSB BANK SELECT LSB PROGRAM CHANGE <BRch/PRch> EnH PITCH BENDER <BRch> F0H,43H,0nH,0AH....F7H (PK_ _2239_ _) F0H,43H,0nH,7CH....F7H (PK_ _2239_ _) F0H,43H,2nH,0AH,F7H F0H,43H,2nH,7CH,F7H F0H,43H,2nH,7DH,F7H F0H,43H,76H,04H,gnH....F7H F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H F0H,7EH,00/7FH,09H,01H,F7H F0H,43H,73H,01H,02H,F7H F0H,43H,73H,01H,03H,F7H F0H,43H,73H,01H,10H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,02H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,03H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,04H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,05H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,06H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,07H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,08H,F7H F0H,43H,76H,05H,09H,F7H EXT 0-0 TIMING CLOCK <BRch/PRch> ON 0-0 CONTROL CHANGE SW TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE 0-0 TRANSPOSE ON (-) <BRch/PRch> <BRch> <BRch> <BRch/PRch> ON 0-0 PROGRAM CHANGE SW ON 0 -0 PITCH BENDER SW ON 0- 0 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW 242 MEMORY BULK DUMP PANEL DATA BULK DUMP MEMORY BULK DUMP REQ. PANEL DATA REQ. NAME DATA REQ. CONTROLLER SWITCH TO DOC MODE SWITCH TO GM MODE INTERNAL CLOCK EXTERNAL CLOCK CONT./PROG. CHANGE SW OFF CONTROL CHANGE SW OFF CONTROL CHANGE SW ON PROGRAM CHANGE SW OFF PROGRAM CHANGE SW ON PITCH BENDER SW OFF PITCH BENDER SW ON SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW OFF SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW ON de funciones MIDI <Transmission Conditions> Tch :Transmit Channel STch :Split Transmit Channel SeqTch:Sequencer Transmit Channel ACTIVE SENSE START STOP FEH FAH FCH TIMING CLOCK F8H Panel Data NOTE ON/OFF 9nH MODULATION WHEEL BnH,01H VOLUME* BnH,07H EXPRESSION BnH,0BH SUSTAIN BnH,40H * Exclusive VOLUME data also available. MIDI INT 0-0 TIMING CLOCK TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE TRANSPOSE 0-0 ON n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, (+) ORCHESTRATION, and pitch. ON n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, 0- 0 ORCHESTRATION, and others (EXP.PDL CONTROL SEL/WHEEL SEL/SUS.PART SEL). CHANGE SW FOOT CONTROLLER BnH,50H BANK SELECT (CUSTOM VOICE SW) PROGRAM CHANGE BnH,00H 20H CnH, 00H~63H n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, ORCHESTRATION, and pitch. PITCH BENDER EnH n=T/STch selected according to SplitSend, ORCHESTRATION, and PITCH BEND SEL. MEMORY BULK DUMP PANEL DATA BULK DUMP NAME DATA TRANS. DOC MODE from REMOTE GM MODE from REMOTE F0H,43H,0nH,0AH....F7H F0H,43H,0nH,7CH....F7H F0H,43H,0nH,7DH....F7H F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,01H.....F7H Controller F0H,43H,76H,04H,F7H Sequencer Data NOTE ON/OFF <Tch> MODULATION WHEEL BnH,01H VOLUME * BnH,07H SUSTAIN BnH,40H BANK SELECT (CUSTOM VOICE) PROGRAM CHANGE BnH,00H 20H CnH,00H~63H PITCH BENDER EnH ON 0- 0 PITCH BENDER SW <Tch> ON 0-0 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SW TRANSPOSE 9nH ON 0 -0 PROGRAM CHANGE SW TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE 0-0 ON (+) ON <SeqTch> 0-0 CONTROL CHANGE SW ON 0-0 PROGRAM CHANGE SW ON 0-0 PITCH BENDER SW 243 MIDI Function Tree • MIDI-Funktionsübersicht • Arbre des fonctions MIDI • Arbol de funciones MIDI II. DOC Mode <Reception Conditions> Kch:Key Channel MIDI FEH FAH FCH TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE 0-0 TRANSPOSE ON (-) 8nH 9nH <1~10ch> ACTIVE SENSING START STOP NOTE OFF NOTE ON/OFF <15ch> 8nH 9nH BnH,07H BnH,0BH <1~10ch> BnH,01H MODULATION WHEEL BnH,07H VOLUME BnH,0AH PAN BnH,0BH EXPRESSION BnH,40H SUSTAIN CnH PROGRAM CHANGE EnH PITCH BENDER BnH,7AH LOCAL CONTROL F0H,43H,73H,01H,13H,F7H SWITCH TO REMOTE MODE F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,01H,F7H SWITCH TO GM MODE F0H,43H,73H,01H,11H,0nH,59H,zz,F7H REVERB TYPE <Kch> <16ch> NOTE OFF NOTE ON/OFF VOLUME EXPRESSION <Transmission Conditions> Kch:Key Channel ACTIVE SENSE START STOP TIMING CLOCK FEH FAH FCH F8H TRANSPOSE NOTE ON/OFF MODULATION WHEEL VOLUME EXPRESSION SUSTAIN PROGRAM CHANGE PITCH BENDER REMOTE MODE from DOC GM MODE from DOC 244 MIDI TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE 0-0 ON (+) 9nH BnH,01H BnH,07H BnH,0BH BnH,40H CnH EnH F0H,43H,73H,01H,13H,F7H F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,01H,F7H <Kch> MIDI Function Tree • MIDI-Funktionsübersicht • Arbre des fonctions MIDI • Arbol de funciones MIDI III. GM Mode <Reception Conditions> Kch:Key Channel MIDI FEH FAH FCH <1~9,11~16ch> TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE 0-0 TRANSPOSE ON (-) 8nH 9nH ACTIVE SENSING START STOP NOTE OFF NOTE ON/OFF <10ch> 8nH 9nH NOTE OFF NOTE ON/OFF BnH,07H VOLUME BnH,0BH EXPRESSION <1~9,11~16ch> BnH,01H BnH,07H BnH,0AH BnH,0BH BnH,40H BnH,06H BnH,26H BnH,64H BnH,65H MODULATION WHEEL VOLUME PAN EXPRESSION SUSTAIN DATA ENTRY MSB DATA ENTRY LSB RPN LSB RPN MSB <1~16ch> BnH,5BH BnH,78H BnH,79H BnH,7BH REVERB DEPTH ALL SOUND OFF RESET ALL CTRLS ALL NOTE OFF <Kch> BnH,7AH LOCAL CONTROL <1~9,11~16ch> CnH PROGRAM CHANGE EnH PITCH BENDER F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,02H,F7H F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H SWITCH TO REMOTE MODE SWITCH TO DOC MODE <Transmission Conditions> Kch:Key Channel ACTIVE SENSE START STOP TIMING CLOCK FEH FAH FCH F8H TRANSPOSE NOTE ON/OFF 9nH MODULATION WHEEL VOLUME EXPRESSION SUSTAIN BnH,01H BnH,07H BnH,0BH BnH,40H PROGRAM CHANGE CnH PITCH BENDER EnH MIDI TRANSPOSE ADD NOTE 0-0 ON (+) <Kch> REMOTE MODE from GM F0H,7EH,00H/7FH,09H,02H,F7H DOC MODE from GM F0H,43H,73H,01H,14H,F7H 245 MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI I. Channel Message 1. VOICE MESSAGE 1-1) 8n : NOTE OFF (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) 8 0 0 n k v n: MIDI Channel k: Key Note Number v: Velocity Velocity value ignored. 1-2) 9n : NOTE ON/OFF (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) 9 0 0 n k v n: MIDI Channel k: Key Note Number v: Velocity 00H~7FH Key off when velocity = 0. 1-3) Cn : PROGRAM CHANGE (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) C 0 n p n: MIDI Channel p: Program Number [IN/OUT] Program Number Remote : 0~99 DOC : 0~87 (Some numbers omitted) GM1 : 0~127 1-4) En : PITCH BEND CHANGE (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) E 0 0 n LSB MSB n: MIDI Channel MSB LSB 01111111 01111111 : max : : 01000000 00000000 : center : : 00000000 00000000 : min [IN] Pitch range. Remote : Depends on voice. DOC : ±300¢ GM1 : ±200 cents default. Maximum range ±1 octave with RPN. [OUT] Pitch bend wheel value output. 1-5) Bn : CONTROL CHANGE B 0 0 n c v n: MIDI Channel c: Control Number v: Control Value c=0 (Bank Select MSB) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) [IN/OUT] v = 00H, fixed. 246 c=1 (Modulation Depth) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) [IN] v= Remote :Depends on voice. DOC :vibrato depth GM1 :Depends on voice. [OUT] v = modulation wheel value: 00H(min) ~ 7FH(max). c=7 (Volume) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) [IN] v= Remote :Corresponds to fader position. DOC :7FH=0dB,00H=-∞, 0.1875dB/step GM1 :7FH=0dB,60H=-4.8dB,40H=-11.9dB, 20H=-23.9dB,10H=-36dB,00H=-∞ [OUT] v= Remote :Corresponds to fader position. DOC :Actual dB value applied to tone generator in 0.1875 dB steps, according to fader position. GM1 :Inverse change applied to tone generator in dB, according to fader position. 0dB=7FH,-4.8dB=60H,-11.9dB=40H, -23.9dB=20H,....... c=10 (Pan) (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) [IN] Remote,GM1 DOC V= 00H~07H LEFT 7 LEFT 6 08H~0FH 6 6 10H~17H 5 6 18H~1FH 4 5 20H~27H 3 4 28H~2FH 2 3 30H~37H 1 2 38H~3FH CENTER 1 40H VOICE PAN CENTER 41H~47H CENTER CENTER 48H~4FH RIGHT 1 VOICE PAN 50H~57H 2 RIGHT 1 58H~5FH 3 2 60H~67H 4 3 68H~6FH 5 4 70H~77H 6 5 78H~7FH 7 6 c=11 (Expression) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) [IN] v= Remote : Corresponds to expression position. DOC : 7FH=0dB,00H=-∞, 0.1875dB/step GM1 : 7FH=0dB,60H=-4.8dB,40H=-11.9dB, 20H=-23.9dB,10H=-36dB,00H=-∞ [OUT] v= Remote : Corresponds to expression position. DOC : Actual dB value applied to tone generator in 0.1875 dB steps, according to expression position. GM1 : Inverse change applied to tone generator in dB, according to expression position. 0dB=7FH,-4.8dB=60H,-11.9dB=40H, -23.9dB=20h,....... c=32 (Bank Select LSB) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) [IN/OUT] v= 00H: CustomVoice SW OFF 01H: CustomVoice SW ON c=64 (Sustain) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) [IN] v= : 00H~3FH=OFF,40H~7FH=ON (In DOC mode 00H~2FH=OFF,30H~7FH=ON) [OUT] v= : 00H=OFF, 7FH=ON c=80 (Foot Controller) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) [IN] v= : 00H~3FH=OFF, 40H~7FH=ON [OUT] v= :00H=OFF, 7FH=ON c=100(RPN LSB) (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O) =101(RPN MSB) [IN] MSB LSB Function v= 00H 00H Pitch Bend Sense 00H 01H Fine Tuning 00H 02H Coarse Tuning c=6 (Data Entry MSB) (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O) =38 (Data Entry LSB) [IN] v= Data input according to RPN, above. Pitch Bend Sense: 1 step = 100/128 cents, range = 0 ~ 1200 cents. Fine Tuning: 1 step = 100/8196 cents, range = ±100 cents. Coarse Tuning: 1 step = 100 cents, range = ±1200 cents. c=91 (Reverb Depth) (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O) v = reverb depth 00H(min) ~ 7FH(max) 2. MODE MESSAGE (Reception only) B 0 0 n c v n: MIDI Channel c: Mode Message v: Value Refer to the chart below. Mode Message Function 120 All Sound off Value 00H~7FH Remote DOC GM1 X X O 121 122 Reset All Ctrls Local Control 00H~7FH 00H (off), All others (on) X O X O O O 123 124 125 All Notes Off OMNI Mode Off OMNI Mode On 00H 00H 00H O O O X X X O X X II. System Message 1. REAL TIME MESSAGE F8 : TIMING CLOCK (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) Transmission only in DOC & GM1 modes. FA : START (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) FC : STOP (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) FE : ACTIVE SENSING (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: O) 2. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (1) MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 00001010 11110111 F0H 43H 2nH 0AH F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus/n: Device Number Format Number EOX (2) MEMORY BULK DUMP DATA (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 00001010 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 01010000 01001011 00100000 00100000 00110010 00110010 00110011 00111001 00100000 0nnnnnnn 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0sssssss 11110111 F0H 43H 0nH 0AH nn nn 50H 4BH 20H 20H 32H 32H 33H 39H 20H nn dd : dd ss F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus/n: Device Number Format Number Byte Count MSB Byte Count LSB Header ’P ’K space space ’2 ’2 ’3 ’9 space Data Number* Data Check-sum EOX * DATA NUMBER 00H SYSTEM SET UP DATA 01H VOICE REGISTRATION DATA 02H PANEL REGISTRATION DATA 03H, 04H SUPER STYLE PLAY DATA 05H~07H PAD DATA 08H CUSTOM VOICE DATA 09H~1AH CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT DATA 1BH~2BH SEQUENCER DATA 247 MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI (3) PANEL DATA REQUEST (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111100 11110111 F0H 43H 2nH 7CH F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus/n: Device Number Format Number EOX (4) PANEL DATA BULK DUMP (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111100 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 01010000 01001011 00100000 00100000 00110010 00110010 00110011 00111001 00100000 00100000 0vvvvvvv 0rrrrrrr 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0sssssss 11110111 F0H 43H 0nH 7CH nn nn 50H 4BH 20H 20H 32H 32H 33H 39H 20H 20H vv rr dd : dd ss F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus/n: Device Number Format Number Byte Count MSB Byte Count LSB Header ’P ’K space space ’2 ’2 ’3 ’9 space space Software Version Number Software Revision Number Data Check-sum EOX (5) NAME DATA REQUEST (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111101 11110111 F0H 43H 2nH 7DH F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus/n: Device Number Format Number EOX (6) NAME DATA TRANSMISSION (Transmission Only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111101 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 01010000 01001011 00100000 248 F0H 43H 0nH 7DH nn nn 50H 4BH 20H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus/n: Device Number Format Number Byte Count MSB Byte Count LSB Header ’P ’K space 00100000 00110010 00110010 00110011 00111001 00100000 00100000 0vvvvvvv 0rrrrrrr 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0sssssss 11110111 20H 32H 32H 33H 39H 20H 20H vv rr cc cc cc cc ss F7H space ’2 ’2 ’3 ’9 space space Software Version Number Software Revision Number Condition Data Check-sum EOX (7) DOC/Remote Control Mode Switching (7.1) REMOTE CONTROL MODE (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: O GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110011 00000001 00010011 11110111 F0H 43H 73H 01H 13H F7H (7.2) DOC MODE 11110000 01000011 01110011 00000001 00010100 11110111 F0H 43H 73H 01H 14H F7H Status EOX (Compatible with Remote:O DOC:X GM1:O) Status EOX (8) GM Level 1/Remote Control Mode Switching (8.1) REMOTE CONTROL MODE (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: X GM1: O) 11110000 01111110 01111111 00001001 00000010 11110111 F0H Status 7EH <Device ID> 00H or 7FH 09H 02H GM Mode Off F7H EOX (8.2) GM Level 1 MODE (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: O GM1: X) 11110000 01111110 01111111 00001001 00000001 11110111 F0H Status 7EH <Device ID> 00H or 7FH 09H 01H GM Mode On F7H EOX MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI (9) CLOCK MODE CHANGE (9.1) INTERNAL MODE (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110011 00000001 00000010 11110111 F0H 43H 73H 01H 02H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard) Product ID Internal Clock Mode EOX (9.2) EXTERNAL MODE (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110011 00000001 00000011 11110111 F0H 43H 73H 01H 03H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard) Product ID External Clock Mode EOX (10) CONTROL/PROGRAM CHANGE OFF (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110011 00000001 00010000 11110111 F0H 43H 73H 01H 10H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard) Product ID MIDI non-sync mode on. EOX (11) CONTROL CHANGE OFF (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00000010 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 02H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) Control Change Off EOX (12) CONTROL CHANGE ON (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00000011 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 03H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) Control Change On EOX (13) PROGRAM CHANGE OFF (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00000100 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 04H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) Program Change Off EOX (14) PROGRAM CHANGE ON (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00000101 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 05H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) Program Change On EOX (15) PITCH BEND OFF (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00000110 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 06H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) Pitch Bender Off EOX (16) PITCH BEND ON (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00000111 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 07H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) Pitch Bender On EOX (17) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE OFF (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000101 00001000 11110111 F0H 43H 76H 05H 08H F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) System Exclusive Off EOX (18) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE ON (Reception only) (Compatible with Remote: O DOC: X GM1: X) 11110000 F0H Status 01000011 43H YAMAHA ID 01110110 76H Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) 00000101 05H 00001001 09H System Exclusive On 11110111 F7H EOX This command can be received even when system exclusive is OFF. (19) REVERB TYPE 11110000 01000011 01110011 00000001 00010001 0000nnnn 01011001 0zzzzzzz 11110111 (Compatible with Remote: X DOC: O GM1: X) F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 0nH 59H zz F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 3 (Single Keyboard) Product ID Reverb Type EOX zz =00 : OFF 01 : ROOM 02 : HALL 03 : HALL 04 : OFF 249 MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI 3. MIDI EXTENDED CONTROL CHANGE Reception & Transmission Rules Règles de réception et de transmission 1 Only controls that are active in each mode are available for reception and transmission. 1 Seules les commandes active dans chaque mode sont disponibles pour la réception et la transmission. 2 As for functions, when a data entry button below the display is pressed a corresponding data entry event is transmitted rather than than the edited value. • Reverb and effect type/depth ON events are transmitted simultaneously. • Harmony type also transmitted simultaneously with an ON event. • ABC mode transmitted when ABC turned ON, and ABC is turned ON when an ABC mode message is received. 2 En ce qui concerne les fonctions, lorsqu’une touche d’introduction de données située sous l’affichage est sollicitée, un événement d’introduction de donnée correspondant est transmis à la place de la valeur éditée. • Reverb, le type/profondeur d’effet et les événements ON sont transmis simultanément. • Le type d’harmonie est également transmis simultanément avec l’événement ON. • Le mode ABC est transmis lorsque ABC est activé et ABC est activé à la réception d’un message ABC 3 For controls such as the DEMO button which is held while some other operation is performed, an ON event is transmitted when the button is pressed and an OFF event is transmitted when the button is released. 4 OFFmON events are transmitted in succession when an auto-repeat controller is used. 4 Les événement ONmOFF sont transmis en succession lorsqu’un contrôleur à répétition automatique est utilisé. Regeln für Empfang und Übertragung Reglas de recepción y transmisión 1 Bei Empfang und Übertragung werden lediglich aktive Bedien- und Steuerelemente berücksichtigt. 1 Para la recepción y transmisión sólo están disponibles los controles que están activados en cada modo. 2 Bei Funktionen wird beim Betätigen einer Dateneingabetaste unter dem Display anstelle eines editierten Werts ein entsprechendes DateneingabeEreignis übertragen. • EIN-Ereignisse (ON) für Hall- und Effekttyp/-tiefe werden gleichzeitig übertragen. • Der Harmonietyp wird ebenfalls zusammen mit einem EIN-Ereignis (ON) übertragen. • Der Modus der automatischen Baß-/Akkordbegleitung wird beim Aktivieren der automatischen Baß-/ Akkordbegleitung übertragen, während die automatische Baß-/Akkordbegleitung selbst beim Empfang einer entsprechenden Meldung eingeschaltet wird. 2 En cuanto a las funciones, cuando se presiona un botón de entrada de datos de debajo del visualizador, se transmite un evento de entrada de datos correspondiente en lugar del valor editado. • Los eventos de activación de reverberación y tipo/ profundidad de efecto se transmiten simultáneamente. • El tipo de armonía también se transmite simultáneamente con un evento de activación. • El modo ABC se transmite cuando se activa ABC, y ABC se activa cuando se recibe un mensaje del modo ABC. 3 Für Bedienelemente wie die DEMO-Taste, die beim Ausführen eines anderen Vorgangs gedrückt gehalten wird, wird beim Betätigen der Taste ein EIN-Ereignis (ON) übertragen und beim Loslassen der Taste ein AUSEreignis (OFF). 4 AUSmEIN-Ereignisse werden bei Verwendung eines Reglers mit automatischer Wiederholfunktion aufeinanderfolgend übertragen. 250 3 Dans le cas de commandes telles que la touche [DEMO], qui doit maintenue enfoncée pendant que d’autres opérations sont réalisées, un événement ON est transmis lorsque la touche est enfoncée et un événement OFF lorsqu’elle est relâchée. 3 Para los controles tales como el botón DEMO, que se mantiene retenido mientras se efectúa otra operación, se transmite un evento de activación cuando se presiona el botón, y un evento de desactivación cuando se suelta el botón. 4 Los efectos de desactivación->activación (OFFmON) se transmiten en sucesión cuando se usa un controlador de repetición automática. MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI F0H 43H 76H 04H gn cc dd F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) g=0, n:Local Device Number cc: Controller number Data EOX 1BYTE DATA dd 0 00H 00H : 23H 24H : 29H 2AH 01H 00H 01H 02H 03H 03H 00H 01H 02H 04H 00H 05H 00H 08H 7AH : 7FH 00H : 06H 0BH 01H 07H 08H 0CH 00H 01H : 04H 0DH 04H 05H Parameter Function Remote cc DOC/GM1 g PRESET 0:0 : PRESET 5:5 CUSTOM 0 : CUSTOM 5 DISK OFF SF FC MB OFF (Release button) INTRO./FILL1 ON (Press) INTRO./FILL2 ON (Press) INTRO./ENDING ON (Press) SYNCHRO START ON (Press) -6 : 2’s complement -1 of 7 bits. 0 : +6 ORCH. 1 ORCH. 2+1 ORCH. 2v1 SSP OFF SSP 1 : SSP 4 KEY VELOCITY OFF KEY VELOCITY ON RHYTHM STYLE O X cc dd 0EH 00H 01H 02H : 18H 40H 41H 42H : 4AH 11H 00H : 0FH 12H 01H 02H 03H 06H 07H ABC Includes ABC ON O INTRO./FILL IN O X 08H 09H X INTRO./ENDING O X SYNCHRO START O X TRANSPOSE R X ORCHESTRATION O X SUPER STYLE PLAY O X KEY VELOCITY X R 15H 09H : 0EH 17H 18H 19H 1CH 1DH 1FH Remote 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000100 0gggnnnn 0ccccccc 0ddddddd 11110111 g DOC/GM1 (1) 1BYTE DATA FORMAT (O: Transmit & receive. X: No transmit or receive. R: Receive only) O X PANEL REGISTRATION O X MULTI PAD O X SEQUENCER SONG SELECT (Sequencer mode selected when received) CHORD 1 VOL. BASS VOL. RHYTHM VOL. ORCH. 2 VOL. CHORD 2 VOL. VOICE PART SELECT O X O O O O O O X X X X X X HARMONY O X DEMONSTRATION O X VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY O X Parameter Function REVERB OFF REVERB ON REVERB TYPE 1 : REVERB TYPE 23 EFFECT OFF EFFECT ON EFFECT TYPE 1 : EFFECT TYPE 9 PANEL REGISTRATION A1 PANEL REGISTRATION B8 PAD MULTI PAD TEMPO PAD PERCUSSION REPEAT/SYNC/ BREAK OFF REPEAT/SYNC/ BREAK ON PAD REC/STOP OFF (When released) PAD REC/STOP ON (When pressed) SONG SELECT 1 : SONG SELECT 6 REVERB/EFFECT (Refer to “3 BYTE DATA” for each part) 00H~7FH CHORD 1 VOL. 00H~7FH BASS VOL. 00H~7FH RHYTHM VOL. 00H~7FH ORCH. 2 VOL. 00H~7FH CHORD 2 VOL. 00H VOICE PART SELECT ORCH. 1 01H VOICE PART SELECT ORCH. 2 20H 00H HARMONY OFF 01H HARMONY ON 02H HARMONY TYPE 1 : : 11H HARMONY TYPE 16 22H 00H DEMO OFF 01H DEMO ON 23H 00H VOICE REGIST: RATION 1 09H VOICE REGISTRATION 10 Transmitted when ON. Transmitted when ON. 251 MIDI Messages • MIDI-Meldungen • Messages MIDI • Mensajes MIDI dd X O O O O X 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000100 0gggnnnn 0ccccccc 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 cc 1 00H 40~280 TEMPO VALUE (Expressed in 14 bits) 01H 00H 00H~7FH PAD 1 01H 00H~7FH PAD 2 02H 00H~7FH PAD 3 03H 00H~7FH PAD 4 04H 00H~7FH PAD 5 05H 00H~7FH PAD 6 06H 00H~7FH PAD 7 07H 00H~7FH PAD 8 02H 00H 00H~63H PRESET VOICE 01H 00H~63H CUSTOM VOICE 03H 00H 00H~59H PRESET VOICE 01H 00H~59H CUSTOM VOICE 04H 00H 00H (Normal) ORCH. 1 01H (1up) 7FH (1down) 01H 00H (Normal) ORCH. 2 01H (1up) 7FH (1down) X O X O X dd1 dd2 Parameter Function TEMPO O X PAD ON/OFF O X ORCH.2 VOICE O X MB VOICE O X OCTAVE CHANGE R X R X dd2≠0:ON (Press) dd2∞0:OFF (Release) (3) 3BYTE DATA FORMAT (O: Transmit & receive. X: No transmit or receive. R: Receive only) 11110000 01000011 01110110 00000100 0gggnnnn 0ccccccc 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 (Not transmitted when voice or style changed) F0H 43H 76H 04H gn cc dd1 dd2 dd3 F7H Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) g=2, n: Local Device Number cc: Controller number Data1 Data2 Data3 EOX dd1 dd2 dd3 Parameter Function 3BYTE DATA R O X X g cc 2 00H 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 01H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 00H~07H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H RHYTHM BASS CHORD2 CHORD1 ORCH. 2 ORCH. 1 BASS CHORD2 CHORD1 ORCH. 2 ORCH. 1 Remote 427.5Hz PITCH TUNE : 2’s complement of 7 bits. 439.5Hz 440.0Hz (0.5Hz/Step) : 452.5Hz RE-START RE-START g=1, n: Local Device Number cc: Controller number Data1 Data2 EOX g X X Status YAMAHA ID Substatus Section No.= 6 (Portable Keyboard) 2BYTE DATA X O F0H 43H 76H 04H gn cc dd1 dd2 F7H DOC/GM1 252 DATA ENTRY SW O (2) 2BYTE DATA FORMAT (O: Transmit & receive. X: No transmit or receive. R: Receive only) Remote IA OFF INTERACTIVE IA ON ACCOMPANIMENT VERSE1 VERSE2 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 SOLO OFF SOLO ON EXIT FUNCTION/ FUNCTION 1 : FUNCTION 6 SEQUENCER OFF SEQUENCER SEQUENCER ON MODE/ CUS.ACCOMP. OFF CUSTOM ACCOMP. CUS.ACCOMP. ON MODE EDIT OFF SEQUENCER/ EDIT ON CUSTOM DELETE OFF (When released) ACCOMP. DELETE ON (When pressed) f OFF (When released) f ON (When pressed) r OFF (When released) r ON (When pressed) p ON (When pressed) RECORD OFF(When released) RECORD ON (When pressed) TRACK1/CHORD1 SEQUENCER/ CUSTOM ACCOMP. TRACK6/CHORD6 TRACK7/BASS ACCOMP/RHYTHM LEFT HOLD OFF LEFT HOLD LEFT HOLD ON s PAGE/SHIFT SW t < > 2AH 00H LCD SW 1 OFF (When released) 01H LCD SW 1 ON (When pressed) 02H LCD SW 2 OFF (When released) 03H LCD SW 2 ON (When pressed) 04H LCD SW 3 OFF (When released) 05H LCD SW 3 ON (When pressed) 06H LCD SW 4 OFF (When released) 07H LCD SW 4 ON (When pressed) 2BH 67H : 7FH 00H : 19H 2CH 00H Function DOC/GM1 24H 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 25H 00H 01H : 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 26H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 27H 00H : 05H 06H 07H 28H 00H 01H 29H 00H 01H 02H 03H Parameter Remote cc DOC/GM1 g O X Effect depth. O Values for all parts transmitted when effect is turned ON. X Reverb depth. Values for all parts transmitted when reverb is turned ON. DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Mode Voice List Stimmenverzeichnis für DOC-Modus (Disk Orchestra Collection) Liste des voix du mode DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Lista de Voces del modo DISK ORCHESTRA (DOC) Number 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Name BRASS TRUMPET FRENCH HORN SAX 1 CLARINET OBOE FLUTE 1 ACCORDION STRINGS 1 VIOLIN 1 FULL ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN 1 PIANO 1 ELECTRIC PIANO 1 HARPSICHORD CELESTA VIBES MARIMBA CLAVI GLOCKEN SYNTH BRASS — CRYSTAL TIMPANI GUT GUITAR JAZZ GUITAR 1 ROCK GUITAR 1 SITAR ACOUSTIC BASS 1 ELECTRIC BASS 1 ELECTRIC BASS 2 SYNTH BASS — — — — — — — — MUTE TRUMPET HARMONICA CHOIR JAZZ ORGAN 1 Display Brass Trumpet Fr.Horn Sax 1 Clarinet Oboe Flute 1 Acordion Strings1 Violin 1 FullOrgn JazzOrg1 Piano 1 E.Piano1 Harpsi. Celesta Vibes Marimba Clavi Glocken SynBrass Crystal Timpani Gut Gtr JazzGtr1 RockGtr1 Sitar Aco.Bas1 E.Bass 1 E.Bass 2 Syn.Bass Mute Trp Hamonica Choir JazzOrg1 Number 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Name SYNTH WOOD SYNTH STRINGS SYNTH CHOIR PIANO 1 PIANO 2 HONKY-TONK PIANO ELECTRIC PIANO 2 BRIGHT PIANO BRIGHT PIANO FOLK GUITAR ROCK GUITAR 1 BANJO PIZZICATO STRINGS HARP STEEL DRUM — BRASS DECAY FLUTE DECAY STRINGS DECAY CHOIR DECAY FULL ORGAN DECAY JAZZ ORGAN DECAY SYNTH BRASS DECAY SAX DECAY CLAVINOVA TONE ROCK GUITAR 2 MUTE GUITAR ACOUSTIC BASS 2 JAZZ GUITAR 2 POP BRASS STRINGS 2 VIOLIN 2 ORGAN SAX 2 ELECTRIC BASS 3 FLUTE 2 BASSOON CHAMBER STRINGS JAZZ ORGAN 2 — — — — ORCHESTRA HIT Display Syn.Wood Syn.Str SynChoir Piano 1 Piano 2 HnkyTonk E.Piano2 BritePno BritePno Folk Gtr RockGtr1 Banjo Pizz.Str Harp SteelDrm Brass D. Flute D. StringsD Choir D. FullOrgD JazzOrgD SynBrasD Sax D. Clavnova RockGtr2 Mute Gtr Aco.Bas2 JazzGtr2 PopBrass Strings2 Violin 2 Organ Sax 2 E.Bass 3 Flute 2 Bassoon Chamber JazzOrg2 Orch.Hit 253 GENERAL MIDI (GM) Mode Voice List • Stimmenverzeichnis für GM-Modus (General MIDI) Liste des voix du mode GENERAL MIDI (GM) • Lista de voces del modo GENERAL MIDI (GM) Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 254 Group Piano Chromatic Percussion Organ Guitar Bass Strings Ensemble Brass Name (GM) Acoustic Grand Piano Bright Acoustic Piano Electric Grand Piano Honky-tonk Piano Electric Piano 1 Electric Piano 2 Harpsichord Clavi Celesta Glockenspiel Music Box Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone Tubular Bells Dulcimer Drawbar Organ Percussive Organ Rock Organ Church Organ Reed Organ Accordion Harmonica Tango Accordion Acoustic Guitar (nylon) Acousitic Guitar (steel) Electric Guitar (jazz) Electric Guitar (clean) Electric Guitar (muted) Overdriven Guitar Distortion Guitar Guitar Harmonics Acoustic Bass Electric Bass (finger) Electric Bass (pick) Fretless Bass Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Strings Pizzicato Strings Orchestral Harp Timpani String Ensemble 1 String Ensemble 2 Synth Strings 1 Synth Strings 2 Choir ∞hs Voice Oohs Synth Voice Orchestra Hit Trumpet Trombone Tuba Muted Trumpet French Horn Brass Section Synth Brass 1 Synth Brass 2 Display GrandPno BritePno E.Grand HnkyTonk E.Piano1 E.Piano2 Harpsi. Clavi. Celesta Glocken MusicBox Vibes Marimba Xylophon TubulBel Dulcimer DrawOrgn PercOrgn RockOrgn ChrchOrg ReedOrgn Acordion Harmnica TangoAcd NylonGtr SteelGtr Jazz Gtr CleanGtr Mute.Gtr Ovrdrive Dist.Gtr GtrHarmo Aco.Bass FngrBass PickBass Fretless SlapBas1 SlapBas2 SynBass1 SynBass2 Violin Viola Cello ContraBs Trem.Str Pizz.Str Harp Timpani Strings1 Strings2 Syn.Str1 Syn.Str2 Choir∞h VoiceOoh SynVoice Orch.Hit Trumpet Trombone Tuba Mute.Trp Fr.Horn BrasSect SynBras1 SynBras2 Number 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Group Reed Pipe Synth Lead Synth Pad Synth Effects Ethnic Percussive Sound Effects Name (GM) Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Blown Bottle Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Lead 1 (square) Lead 2 (sawtooth) Lead 3 (calliope) Lead 4 (chiff) Lead 5 (charang) Lead 6 (voice) Lead 7 (fifths) Lead 8 (bass+lead) Pad 1 (new age) Pad 2 (warm) Pad 3 (polysynth) Pad 4 (choir) Pad 5 (bowed) Pad 6 (metallic) Pad 7 (halo) Pad 8 (sweep) FX 1 (rain) FX 2 (soundtrack) FX 3 (crystal) FX 4 (atmosphere) FX 5 (brightness) FX 6 (goblins) FX 7 (echoes) FX 8 (sci-fi) Sitar Banjo Shamisen Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Taiko Drum Melodic Tom Synth Drum Reverse Cymbal Guitar Fret Noise Breath Noise Seashore Bird Tweet Telephone Ring Helicopter Applause Gunshot Display SprnoSax Alto Sax TenorSax Bari.Sax Oboe Eng.Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder PanFlute Bottle Shakhchi Whistle Ocarina SquareLd Saw.Lead CaliopLd Chiff Ld CharanLd Voice Ld Fifth Ld Bass &Ld NewAgePd Warm Pad PolySyPd ChoirPad BowedPad MetalPad Halo Pad SweepPad Rain SoundTrk Crystal Atmosphr Bright Goblins Echoes SF Sitar Banjo Shamisen Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai TnklBell Agogo SteelDrm WoodBlok TaikoDrm MelodTom Syn.Drum RevCymbl FretNoiz BrthNoiz Seashore Tweet Telphone Helicptr Applause Gunshot PSR-5700 Percussion Map • PSR-5700 Schlagzeugklang-Verzeichnis Carte de batterie du PSR-5700 • Mapa de percusión del PSR-5700 * Reportez-vous à cette carte en cas de réception de données MIDI sur le canal de rythme * refer to this map when receiveing MIDI data on the rhythm channel. * Richten Sie sich zum Empfang von MIDI-Daten auf dem Rhythmuskanal nach diesem Verzeichnis. Key (MIDI) Number 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Note Name C-1 Db-1 D-1 Eb-1 E-1 F-1 F#-1 G-1 Ab-1 A-1 Bb-1 B-1 C0 Db0 D0 Eb0 E0 F0 F#0 G0 Ab0 A0 Bb0 B0 C1 Db1 D1 Eb1 E1 F1 F#1 G1 Ab1 A1 Bb1 B1 C2 Db2 D2 Hand Claps Triangle Close Whistle Low Triangle Open Whistle Hi Kick 5 Kick 6 Kick 7 Kick 8 Tom Bass Rim Shot 2 Tom Low Tom Mid Snare 7 Tom Hi Snare 8 Snare 9 Snare 3 Snare 10 Snare 11 Brush Hit 2 Snare Roll Snare Brush Squeeze Pedal Hi-Hat 2 Applause Triangle Close Whistle Low Triangle Open Whistle Hi Kick 1 Kick 2 Kick 3 Kick 4 Tom 1 Bass Rim Shot 1 Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Mid Snare 1 Tom 1 Hi Key (MIDI) Number 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 * consulte este mapa para recibir datos MIDI en el canal de ritmo. Note Eb2 E2 F2 F#2 G2 Ab2 A2 Bb2 B2 C3 Db3 D3 Eb3 E3 F3 F#3 G3 Ab3 A3 Bb3 B3 C4 Db4 D4 Eb4 E4 F4 F#4 G4 Ab4 A4 Bb4 B4 C5 Db5 D5 Eb5 E5 F5 • C1 … B5 are included in voice number 98 Drum Kit. • C-1 … B0 are the lower 2 octaves on voice number 99 Pop Drum Kit (C1 … B2). C6 … G8 are the upper 2.5 octaves (C3 … G5). • Ab5 … C6 are included in both voice numbers 98 Drum Kit and 99 Pop Drum Kit. • C1 ... B5 sind Teil der “Schlagzeug-Stimme” DRUM KIT (Nr. 98). • C1 ... B0 entsprechen den unteren beiden Oktaven bei der “Schlagzeugstimme” POP DRUM KIT (Nr. 99) (C1 ... B2). C6 ... B8 entsprechen den oberen zweieinhalb Oktaven (C3 ... G5). • Ab5 ... C6 sind Teil beider “Schlagzeug-Stimmen”, DRUM KIT (Nr. 98) und POP DRUM KIT (Nr. 99). Name Snare 2 Snare 3 Snare 4 Snare 5 Snare 6 Brush Hit 1 Snare Roll Snare Brush Squeeze Pedal Hi-Hat 1 Closed Hi-Hat 1 Timbales Low Open Hi-Hat 1 Timbales Hi Closed Hi-Hat 2 Open Hi-Hat 2 Conga 1 Low Ride Cymbal 1 Conga 1 Hi Ride Cup 1 Conga 1 Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Bongo Low Splash Cymbal Bongo Hi March Cymbal Surdo Cabasa Tom Brush Low Vibraslap Tom Brush Mid Claves Tom Brush Hi Guiro Long Cuica Low Guiro Short Cuica Hi Tambourine Cowbell Low Key (MIDI) Number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Note Name F#5 G5 Ab5 A5 Bb5 B5 C6 Db6 D6 Eb6 E6 F6 F#6 G6 Ab6 A6 Bb6 B6 C7 Db7 D7 Eb7 E7 F7 F#7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb7 B7 C8 Db8 D8 Eb8 E8 F8 F#8 G8 Agogo Low Castanet Agogo Hi Finger Snaps Cross Sticks — Closed Hi-Hat 2 Timbales Low Open Hi-Hat 2 Timbales Hi Closed Hi-Hat 3 Open Hi-Hat 3 Conga 2 Low Ride Cymbal 2 Conga 2 Hi Ride Cup 2 Conga 2 Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Bongo Low Chinese Cymbal Bongo Hi Reverse Cymbal E.Tom Bass Maracas E.Tom Low Vibraslap E.Tom Mid Wood Block E.Tom Hi Guiro Long Scratch Noise Low Guiro Short Scratch Noise Hi Running Water Cowbell Hi Agogo Low Dropping Coin • C1 ... B5 inclus dans la voix 98 Drum Kit. • C-1 .. B0 sont les 2 octaves les plus basses de la voix numéro 99 Pop Drum Kit (C1 ... B2). C6 ... G8 sont les 2,5 octaves les plus hautes (C3 ... G5). • Ab5 .. C6 inclus dans les deux voix 98 Drum Kit et 99 Pop Drum Kit. • C1 ... B5 se incluyen en el número de voz 98 Drum Kit. • C1 ... B0 son las 2 octavas inferiores del número de voz 99 Pop Drum Kit (C1 ... B2). C6 ... G8 son las 2,5 octavas superiores (G3 ... G5). • Ab5 ... C6 se incluyen en los números de voz 98 Drum Kit y 99 Pop Drum Kit. 255 GM/DOC MODE Percussion Map • Schlagzeugklang-Verzeichnis für DOC/GM-Modus Carte de batterie en mode DOC/GM • Mapa de percusión del modo DOC/GM MODE Key (MIDI) Number 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 256 Note F#0 G0 Ab0 A0 Bb0 B0 C1 Db1 D1 Eb1 E1 F1 F#1 G1 Ab1 A1 Bb1 B1 C2 Db2 D2 Eb2 E2 F2 F#2 G2 Ab2 A2 Bb2 B2 C3 Db3 D3 Eb3 E3 F3 F#3 G3 Ab3 A3 Bb3 B3 C4 Db4 D4 Eb4 E4 F4 F#4 G4 Ab4 A4 Bb4 GM Name DOC Name — — — — — Acoustic Bass Drum Bass Drum 1 Side Stick Acoustic Snare Hand Clap Electric Snare Low Floor Tom Closed Hi-Hat High Floor Tom Pedal Hi-Hat Low Tom Open Hi-Hat Low-Mid Tom Hi-Mid Tom Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Hi Bongo Low Bongo Mute Hi Conga Open Hi Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Whistle Long Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Hi Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle — Snare Brush — Closed Hi-Hat Heavy — Crash Cymbal Light Bass Drum Light Snare Drum+Rim Heavy Ride Cup Snare Drum+Rim Light — — Bass Drum Rim Shot Snare Drum Heavy Snare Brush Shot Snare Drum Light Pedal Hi-Hat Snare Drum Echo Tom 4 Closed Hi-Hat Tom 3 Open Hi-Hat Tom 2 Tom 1 Ride Cymbal Electronic Tom 3 Crash Cymbal Electronic Tom 2 Crash Cymbal Electronic Tom 1 Conga Low Cabasa Conga High Metronome Bongo Timbale Low Claves Timbale High Castanets Cuica Low Cowbell Cuica High Hand Claps Agogo Low — Agogo High Bongo Low Cuica Low Tambourine Crash Cymbal Triangle Closed Snare Brush Triangle Open YAMAHA [ Portatone ] Date : 07/23 1992 Model PSR-5700 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0 +––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+ : : Transmitted : Recognized : Remarks : : Function : : : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Basic Default : 1-16 : 1-16 : memorized : :Channel Changed : 1-16 : 1-16 : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ : Default : 3 : 1,3 *2 : memorized : :Mode Messages : X : OMNIon,OMNIoff : : : Altered : ************** : X : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Note : 36-96 : 0-127 : : :Number : True voice: ************** : 0-127 : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Velocity Note on : O 9nH,v=1-127 : O v=1-127 : : : Note off : X 9nH,v=0 : X : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :After Key’s : X : X : : :Touch Ch’s : X : X : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Pitch Bender : O : O 0-12 semi *1:7bit resolution : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ : 0,32 : O *2 : O *2 :Bank Select : : 1 : O : O :Modulation : : 6,38 : X : O *3 :Data Entry : :Control 7 : O : O :Volume : : 10 : X : O :Pan : :Change 11 : O : O :Expression : : 64 : O : O :Sustain : : 80 : O *2 : O *2 :Foot Controller : : 91 : X : O *3 :Reverb Depth : : 100,101 : X : O *3 :RPN LSB,MSB : : 120 : X : O *3 :All Sound Off : : 121 : X : O *3 :Reset All Ctrls : : : : : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Program : O 0-99 *4 : O 0-99 *4 : : :Change : True # : ************** : 0-99 *4 : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :System Exclusive : O : O : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :System : Song Pos : X : X : : : : Song.Sel : X : X : : :Common : Tune : X : X : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :System :Clock : O : O *2 : : :Real Time:Commands : O : O : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Aux :Local ON/OFF : X : O : : : :All Notes OFF: X : O (122-125) *5: : :Mes- :Active Sense : O : O : : :sages:Reset : X : X : : :–––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+ :Notes : *1 = 0-3 if DOC mode is on : : *2 = only remote control mode : : *3 = only GM mode : : *4 = 0-127 if GM mode is on 0-87 if DOC mode is on : : *5 = 122-123 if GM mode is on 122 if DOC mode is on : :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+ Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O : Yes 257 Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X : No Specifications • Technische Daten • Spécifications • Especificaciones KEYBOARD: 61 Keys (C1~C6) with Touch Response REGISTRATION: VOICE REGISTRATION: 10 PANEL REGISTRATION: 16 POLYPHONY: 38 notes max. DISPLAY: LED, LCD VOICES: Preset 100 voices Custom 100 voices (Programmable) DISK DRIVE: 3.5” FDD, Compatibility with DOC (Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection) and General MIDI software ACCOMPANIMENT: INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT: Preset 36 styles Disk 1 style * 5 variations for each style CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT: 6 styles + INTRO/FILL/ENDING (Programmable) SUPER STYLE PLAY: Preset 36 styles Disk 1 style * 4 variations for each style DEMONSTRATION: 4 Songs CONNECTORS: MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), FOOT SW., SUSTAIN, EXP. PEDAL, HEADPHONES, AUX. IN (R, L/L+R), AUX. OUT (R, L/L+R) AMPLIFIER: 10W x 2 SPEAKERS: 16cm (6-5/16") x 2, 5cm (1-5/16") x 2 EFFECT: Reverb based effect 23 types, Chorus based effect 9 types, Harmony 16 types DIMENSIONS (W x D x H): PERCUSSION: WEIGHT: Keyboard; 92 (Percussion + Sound Effect) PAD: 8 (MULTI/PERC./TEMPO) AUTO BASS CHORD: Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Manual Bass 1067mm (42") x 409mm (16-1/8") x 160mm (6-5/16") 15.0 kg (33.1lbs.) SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES: • Music Stand • FC5 Foot Switch • Sample Data Disk • “Getting Started” Manual • “Advanced Features” Manual SEQUENCER: 8 Tracks, 6 Songs * Specifications subject to change without notice. 258